REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS TO FIT OUT FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS AT THE GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION

Transcription

1 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS TO FIT OUT FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS AT THE GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION. INTRODUCTION Levy Premium Foodservice Limited Partnership (the Owner ) is requesting interested firms to submit their proposals to fit out two restaurant tenant spaces on the first floor of the Global Center for Health Innovation (the GCHI ), located at St. Clair Ave NE, Cleveland, OH CONTACTS Owner: Contact: Architect: Contact: Levy Premium Foodservice Limited Partnership 980 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 400 Chicago, IL 606 (32) Michele L. Larimer Project Manager mlarimer@levyrestaurants.com Richard L. Bowen + Associates Inc Shaker Blvd. Cleveland, OH 4420 (26) Ken Chow Project Architect kchow@rlba.com 3. BID AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Contractor shall construct the Project pursuant to the Construction Documents and in accordance with the Owner s schedule requirements. Contractor shall hold all subcontracts and shall be fully responsible for the means and methods of construction, project safety, project completion within the schedule below, monitoring compliance with all local residency, equal employment, and prevailing wage requirements, and submitting monthly reports of these activities to the Owner. A. Schedule i. Request for Proposal Issued October 5, 207 ii. Proposal Due October 9, 207 iii. Projected Contract Date October 24, 207 iv. Projected Project Start Date November, 207 v. Projected Project Completion Date January 9, 208

2 B. Communication Firms considering responding to this RFP are strictly prohibited from communicating with any member of the Owner s staff. A mandatory pre-bid meeting will take place on October 2, 207 at 2:00pm in the Global Center for Health Innovation (St. Clair Ave, NE, Cleveland, OH 444). Enter through main entrance on the corner of St. Clair Ave NE and W. Mall Dr. Please check in at reception. The architect will be available to answer questions. Additional questions should be sent to the Architect via . Questions received by October 3, 207 will be responded to on October 6, 207. C. Cancellation and Rejection The Owner reserves the right to cancel at any time for any reason this solicitation and to reject all proposals. The Owner shall have no liability to any proposer arising out of such cancellation or rejection. The Owner reserves the right to waive minor variations in the selection process. 4. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Insurance The successful Contractor will be required to obtain and maintain in force always during the term of the agreement as a direct cost of operation, insurance coverage as directed by the Owner. Such coverage will be obtained from an insurance company authorized and licensed to do business in the State of Ohio and rated not less than A-VIII by the most current Best s Manual. Furthermore, said insurance company or companies must be approved by the Owner. It is anticipated that such coverage shall include the following: i. General Aggregate Coverage in the amount of $5,000, This coverage must be written on an occurrence form, claims made policies will be unacceptable to the Owner. This Comprehensive General Liability insurance shall cover the Contractor, the Owner, the Cuyahoga County Convention Facilities Development Corporation (CCCFDC), the managing agent of the Global Center for Health Innovation (SMG), the County of Cuyahoga, OH, and their employees, agents and officers from and against any claim arising out of personal injury of Contractor or the Contractor s failure to comply with the terms of this Contract. Such policy or policies of insurance shall include coverage for claims of any persons because of an incident directly or indirectly related to the employment of such persons by a Contractor or by any other persons. This coverage shall

3 include blanket contractual insurance and such coverage shall make express reference to the indemnification provisions set forth in this agreement. The policy shall also be endorsed to include coverage for products, completed operations, and independent contractors. ii. Workers Compensation Coverage shall comply with all State and Federal requirements for all employees of Contractor and will be in statutory required limits. iii. Excess Liability Coverage, in the amount of $,000, shall be in the form of an Umbrella policy rather than a following form excess policy. This policy or policies shall be specifically endorsed to be excess of the required Comprehensive General Liability Coverage, the Employers Liability Coverage on the Workers Compensation policy, and the Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy. iv. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Coverage, in an amount not less than $,000,000.00, shall be maintained. Such coverage will include all owned, non-owned, leased and/or hired motor vehicles, which may be used by Contractor about the services, required under the Contract. v. All such insurance coverage, except for Workers Compensation, shall name the Owner, CCCFDC, SMG, the County of Cuyahoga, OH, and their employees, agents, officers, and directors as additional insured thereunder. vi. Contractor shall waive any and every claim against the Owner, SMG, CCCFDC, the County of Cuyahoga, OH, and their respective agents, and employees which arises or may arise in their favor for all loss or damage to any of its property. If any policy does not presently contain provisions which permit such a waiver, contractor agrees to obtain an endorsement to its insurance policies permitting such waiver of subrogation.. Indemnification: The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner, SMG, CCCFDC, the County of Cuyahoga, OH, and Members, Officers, and their employees from, and against all claims, suits, judgments, expense, and costs of every kind and description, by reason of injury to persons or damage to property, resulting or alleged to result from any act or omission of the Contractor or his employees or agents, including, but not limited to expenses or claims related to environment contamination, injury or clean up. B. Non Discrimination i. The owner requires that Contractor shall not discriminate against any person or group of persons based upon race, creed, sex, sexual orientation, religion, color, age, veteran status, national origin or ancestry.

4 C. Other Items i. Labor: Contractor shall ensure that its employees and any sub contracted employees are uniformly dressed and have a neat and clean appearance. All employees must display proper identification prominently while working at the Facilities.. Contractor shall ensure that its employees are qualified, licensed and properly trained in the handling and use of all equipment within the Facilities. 2. Contractor shall detail within its response to this RFP its plan for acquiring labor to perform all of the services proposed herein. 3. Contractor shall furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed at the Facility. 4. Contractor shall comply with all applicable labor laws and collective bargaining agreements in its performance of its services. 5. CONTENTS OF RESPONSES A. Responses must include the following: i. Company History/Qualification: Provide a detailed history and a statement of qualifications including a description of comparable services provided for comparable Facilities including dates, overall management and organizational approach. Identify the roles, qualifications, responsibilities and experience on similar projects of the personnel to be assigned to this project. Provide further detail regarding whether Contractor has performed services like those described herein. ii. Scope: Contractor shall provide detailed work and technical plans that describes their understanding of the Scope of Services as well as their strategies, methodologies, resources, approach to labor and action plan to accomplish the requirements defined herein. iii. Financial Qualifications: Provide evidence that Contractor has the financial ability to fulfill its obligations as outlined within the RFP. iv. The Owner wishes to achieve certain participation goals related to participation in the County of Cuyahoga, OH s Small Business Enterprise (SBE) program. If Contractor is registered or will utilize subcontractors that are registered as a Small Business Enterprise (SBE) certified by the County of Cuyahoga, OH in the performance of their obligation under the Agreement the Response should so indicate. v. References: Provide five (5) references stating name, title, company, address and telephone numbers for everyone within these companies who may be contacted.

5 vi. Fees: Contractor must identify any applicable fees for their services within their response to this RFP. vii. Sub-Contractors: Contractor shall identify all sub-contractors which the Contractor anticipates having a significant role in the services. viii. Certifications and Licenses: Contractor must provide all their licenses that are required by the State of Ohio, the County of Cuyahoga, OH and the City of Cleveland, OH. B. All Responses shall be typewritten without erasures or deletions. C. Each copy of the Response shall include the legal name of the Contractor and a statement identifying the Contractor as a sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity as appropriate. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Contractor to a contact. A Response by a corporation shall further give the state or incorporation and whether the Contractor is qualified to do business in the State of Ohio. A response submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent s authority to bind the Contractor. 6. INSTRUCTIONS FOR DELIVERY AND DEADLINE A. Proposals must be submitted in a sealed envelope clearly marked First Floor Tenants Fit Out. B. Original and two copies of the proposal must be submitted and delivered to: Levy Premium Foodservice Limited Partnership St. Clair Ave, NE Cleveland, OH 444 Attn: Matt DelRegno C. Proposals must be received at the above address by 4:00pm on October 9, 207. D. SMG, Richard L. Bowen + Associates, CCCFDC, and the Owner will not be liable for any costs incurred in the preparation and/or presentation of the Proposals. 7. EVALUATION CRITERIA The successful Contractor shall be determined by the following criteria:

6 A. General Qualifications: Includes but not limited to Contractor s overall experience, resources, financial capabilities, qualifications and levels of service and responsiveness to be provided. Also, includes Contractor s detailed work and technical plans and approach to the services as well as their commitment to sustainability. B. Financial Proposal: Includes the proposed pricing to perform the Services described herein. C. Small Business Enterprise (SBE) participation. D. References. E. Oral Presentation/Interviews as applicable. 8. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Documents are available for download at

7 BIDDER S CERTIFICATION The Bidder hereby acknowledges that the following representations in this Bid are material and not mere recitals:. The Bidder has read and understands the Contract Documents and agrees to comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether the Bidder has actual knowledge of the requirements and regardless of any statement or omission made by the Bidder which might indicate a contrary intention. 2. The Bidder represents that the Bid is based upon the Basis of Design and Acceptable Components specified by the Contract Documents. 3. The Bidder acknowledges that all Work shall be completed in the Contract Time, and that each applicable portion of the Work shall be completed upon the respective Milestones, unless an extension of time is granted in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Bidder agrees that the Contract Sum, as amended from time to time by Change Order, shall cover all amounts due from the Owner resulting from interference, disruption, hindrance or delay caused by or between Contractors or their agents and employees. The Bidder agrees that any such interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay is within the contemplation of the Bidder and the Owner and that the Contractor s sole remedy from the Owner for any such interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay shall be an extension of time in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. The Bidder has visited the Project, become familiar with local conditions and has correlated personal observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Bidder has no outstanding questions regarding the interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 5. The Bidder and each person signing on behalf of the Bidder certifies, and in the case of a Bid by a joint venture each member thereof certifies as to such member's entity, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of the undersigned's knowledge and belief: (a) the Base Bid, any Unit Prices and any Alternate bid in the Bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition as to any matter relating to such Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid with any other Bidder; (b) unless otherwise required by law, the Base Bid, any Unit Prices and any Alternate bid in the Bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the Bidder and shall not knowingly be disclosed by the Bidder prior to the bid opening, directly or indirectly, to any other Bidder who would have any interest in the Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid; (c) no attempt has been made or shall be made by the Bidder to induce any other Person to submit or not to submit a Bid for the purpose of restricting competition. 6. The Bidder agrees to furnish the submittals required for execution of the Contract Form within five (5) days of the date of the Notice of Intent to Award. 7. The Bidder acknowledges that, by signing the Bid Form on the Bidder Signature and Information Form on the following page, it is signing the actual Bid and when submitted as a part of its bid packages, shall serve as the Bidder s authorization for the further consideration and activity in the bidding and contract process. 8. Each Bid shall contain the name of every individual interested therein. If the Bidder is a corporation, partnership, sole proprietorship, or limited liability corporation, an officer, partner or principal of the Bidder, as applicable, shall print or type the legal name of the Bidder on the line provided and sign the Bid Form. If the Bidder is a joint venture, an officer, partner or principal, as applicable, of each member of the joint venture shall print or type the legal name of the applicable member on the line provided and sign the Bid Form. All signatures must be original. GCHI First Floor Retail Tenants Fit Out

8 BID FORM Project Name: Global Center for Health Innovation First Floor Retail Tenants Fit Out Location of Project & County: St. Clair Avenue Northeast Cleveland, OH 444 Cuyahoga County Having read and examined the Contract Documents, including without limitation the Drawings and Specifications, prepared by the Architect for the above-referenced Project, and the following Addenda: Addendum Number Date of Receipt The undersigned Bidder proposes to perform all Work for the applicable Contract(s), in accordance with the Contract Documents. ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS, for the sum of $ Sum in words: Contingency included in above, for the sum of $ Sum in words: Fee included in above, for the sum of $ Sum in words: GCHI First Floor Retail Tenants Fit Out

9 BIDDER SIGNATURE & INFORMATION BIDDER S NAME (PRINT): Authorized Signature: Title: Company Name: Mailing Address: Telephone Number: ( ) Facsimile Number ( ) Where Incorporated: Type of Business (circle one): corporation partnership sole proprietorship limited liability corporation Federal ID Number: Contact person for Contract processing: GCHI First Floor Retail Tenants Fit Out

10 PROJECT MANUAL St. Clair Avenue, NE Cleveland, OH 444 Bid/PERMIT SET October 4, 207

11

12 GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION Au Bon Pain RLBA #8832. TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Construction Progress Documentation 0000 Summary Substitution Procedures Contract Modification Procedures Payment Procedures 0300 Project Management and Coordination Submittal Procedures Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution 0749 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Closeout Procedures Operation and Maintenance Data Demonstration and Training DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 CONCRETE Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05 METALS Structural Steel Framing Cold-Formed Metal Framing Metal Fabrications Decorative Metal Railings DIVISION 06 WOODS AND PLASTICS Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 0646 A Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets Au Bon Pain 0646 B Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets Starbucks B Plastic Paneling - Starbucks DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 OPENINGS Aluminum-Framed Entrances Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Double Acting Swing Doors Glazing TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

13 DIVISION 09 FINISHES Non-Structural Metal Framing Gypsum Board 09303A Ceramic Tiling Au Bon Pain 0953 A Acoustical Panel Ceilings Au Bon Pain Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring A Wall Coverings Au Bon Pain B Wall Coverings Starbucks Stone Wall Facing Interior Painting DIVISION 0 SPECIALTIES Folding Glass-Panel Partitions 0446 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 2 FURNISHINGS A Stone Countertops Au Bon Pain A Solid Surfacing Countertops Au Bon Pain 2483 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

14 SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Unusual event reports..3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network..4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:. PDF file. 2. Two paper copies, of sufficient size to display entire period or schedule, as required. B. Startup construction schedule.. Submittal of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

15 C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. E. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. F. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event..5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence..6 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award or the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion.. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for major items requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 0 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 5 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

16 D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 0000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 0000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use-of-premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

17 . Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 0 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. H. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities..7 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 5 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed or the Notice of Award.. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line..8 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

18 . List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Testing and inspection. 8. Accidents. 9. Meetings and significant decisions. 0. Unusual events.. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 2. Meter readings and similar recordings. 3. Emergency procedures. 4. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Change Orders received and implemented. 6. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 7. Services connected and disconnected. 8. Equipment or system tests and startups. 9. Partial completions and occupancies. 20. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. C. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one () day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

19

20 SECTION SUMMARY PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 7. Access to site. 8. Coordination with occupants. 9. Work restrictions. 0. Specification and Drawing conventions.. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Work:. Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities..3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Global Center for Health Innovation.. Project Location: St. Clair Avenue, N.E., Cleveland, Ohio 444. B. Owner: Cuyahoga County Convention Facilities Development Corp. (CCCFDC).. Owner's Representative: SMG. C. Architect: Richard L. Bowen + Associates, Inc., 3000 Shaker Blvd., Cleveland, Ohio D. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:. Karpinski Engineering, 335 Euclid Ave., Cleveland, Ohio 445. SUMMARY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

21 E. Web-Based Project Software: Project software administered by Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.. See Section 0300 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using web-based Project software..4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:. Demolition of two tenant spaces and build-out of same spaces to accommodate two restaurants. Work includes modification to existing building façade, structure, and utilities and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Type of Contract:. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract..5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. B. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory Work under this Contract.. Installation of equipment as indicated on Drawings..6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. B. Owner-Furnished Products:. As indicated on Drawings..7 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Contractor-Furnished, Owner-Installed Products:. As indicated on Drawings. SUMMARY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

22 .8 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Each Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking garage, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations..9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 2. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. SUMMARY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

23 .0 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated or coordinated with Owner. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:. Notify Owner not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.. Notify Owner not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building is not permitted. F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.. SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 0 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 0 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. SUMMARY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

24 C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual..2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any person or group of persons based upon race, creed, sex, sexual orientation, religion, color, age, veteran status, national origin, or ancestry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0000 SUMMARY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

25

26 SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Work:. Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers..3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

27 Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. j. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated. k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 5 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated..5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers..6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

28 .7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 5 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

29

30 SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Work:. Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award..3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time..4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

31 e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect..5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Contractor will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner on form acceptable to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

32 SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Work:. Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule..3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment..4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's Project number. PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

33 d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest onehundredth percent, adjusted to total 00 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum. ) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 6. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate Owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 7. Overhead Costs: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items. 8. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 9. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order..5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

34 B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 5th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. G. Transmittal: Submit signed and notarized digital copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by or Architect s web-based project software. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

35 . Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Sustainable design action plans, including preliminary project materials cost data. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 0. Copies of building permits.. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 2. Initial progress report. 3. Report of preconstruction conference. 4. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 5. Performance and payment bonds. 6. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 00 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

36 K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G AIA Document G706A. 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

37

38 SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Work:. Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract..3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents..4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:. Name, address, telephone number, and address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

39 B. Key Personnel Names: Within 7 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.. Post copies of list in project meeting room and in temporary field office, Keep list current at all times..5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required..6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

40 c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling, and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit -/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other firealarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motorcontrol center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

41 a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit. 0. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section "Submittal Procedures." C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format. 2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Auto CAD 203in Microsoft Windows. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in this Project Manual..7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 0. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

42 . Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 2. Contractor's signature. 3. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form from Architect s web-based project management system.. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after :00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within five days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

43 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if Contractor disagrees with response..8 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's CAD drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during construction.. Digital data files may be used by Contractor in preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project record Drawings. 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings. 3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in Auto CAD 203 in Microsoft Windows. 4. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in Project Manual. a. Subcontractors, and other parties granted access by Contractor to Architect's digital data files shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in this Project Manual. B. Web-Based Project Software: Use Architect's web-based Project software site for purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion. C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows:. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated..9 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 0 working days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

44 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 5 days after execution of the Agreement.. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Use of web-based Project software. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises and existing building. p. Work restrictions. q. Working hours. r. Owner's occupancy requirements. s. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. t. Procedures for moisture and mold control. u. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. v. Construction waste management and recycling. w. Parking availability. x. Office, work, and storage areas. y. Equipment deliveries and priorities. z. First aid. aa. Security. bb. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

45 . Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Owner s Representative, Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Installation procedures. u. Coordination with other work. v. Required performance results. w. Protection of adjacent work. x. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 5 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

46 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of Record Documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Procedures for completing and archiving web-based Project software site data files. d. Submittal of written warranties. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. g. Requirements for demonstration and training. h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. j. Submittal procedures. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. ) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: ) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

47 7) Site use. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 0) Quality and work standards. ) Status of correction of deficient items. 2) Field observations. 3) Status of RFIs. 4) Status of Proposal Requests. 5) Pending changes. 6) Status of Change Orders. 7) Pending claims and disputes. 8) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Representative, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: ) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

48 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 0) Work hours. ) Hazards and risks. 2) Progress cleaning. 3) Quality and work standards. 4) Status of RFIs. 5) Proposal Requests. 6) Change Orders. 7) Pending changes. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0300 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

49

50 SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Related Work:. Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 0300 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination drawings and subcontract list and for requirements for web-based Project software. 3. Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals. 5. Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 6. Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 7. Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel..3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

51 .4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 3. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal Category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval..5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 8. Category and type of submittal. 9. Submittal purpose and description. 0. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items.. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 2. Indication of full or partial submittal. 3. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 4. Other necessary identification. 5. Remarks. 6. Signature of transmitter. B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

52 C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. D. Submittals for Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files, or other format indicated by Project software website..6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.. Initial Review: Allow 0 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 0 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.. Note date and content of previous submittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

53 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp..7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

54 d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-/2 by inches (25 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 067 mm). C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials.. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare transmittal in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one () full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

55 color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect will retain two (2) Sample sets; remainder will be returned. ) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal. G. Certificates:. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated. 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

56 Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. H. Test and Research Reports:. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 2. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 3. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 5. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use..8 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

57 .9 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval..0 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it.. Submittals by Web-Based Project Software: Architect will indicate, on Project software website, the appropriate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will return it. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

58 SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Work:. Section 0000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions..3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations..4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 5 days of date established for commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility. C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Not allowed. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

59 D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 24 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program..5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A7...6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 0-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 5 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 70 Test Method 2. B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (94 by 524 mm). C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. D. Other materials as indicated on Drawings. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Owner will provide conditioned interior space for field offices for duration of Project. B. Storage and Fabrication Areas: Coordinate with Owner for designated areas.. Notify Owner if storage for combustible materials is needed. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

60 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with fourstage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 0000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.. Arrange with Owner for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.. Toilets: Use of existing toilet facilities as designated by Owner will be permitted. C. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped airfiltration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dustproducing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dustcontainment devices. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

61 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filterequipped vacuum equipment. D. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Parking: Parking within existing building is not permited. B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 0749 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." C. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. D. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. E. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

62 B. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday. D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. F. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.4-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.4-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 8 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 24; manage fire-prevention program.. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

63 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

64 SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Work:. Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified..3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, inservice performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

65 provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 0 days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 5 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.88.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of serviceconnected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

66 d. Speed. e. Ratings. 3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 2, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements..6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling:. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage:. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner..7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

67 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final. B. Product Selection Procedures:. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: " PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

68 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: " 3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: " 4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: " 5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: " 6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: " 7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

69 C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements. 2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested. B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

70 SECTION EXECUTION PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:. Construction layout. 2. Installation of the Work. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Work:. Section 0000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning. 4. Section 0249 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building..3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work..4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 0 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

71 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems..5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

72 d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

73 indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 0300 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

74 C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.. Comply with Section "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

75 C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 0000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

76 a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.. Comply with requirements in NFPA 24 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.. Remove liquid spills promptly. EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

77 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 0749 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

78 B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION EXECUTION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

79

80 SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste..3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling, or deposit in landfill, incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or designated spoil areas on Owner s property. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work..4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition and construction waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

81 . Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner..5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice of Award..6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Universal certified by EPA-approved certification program. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with transportation and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Comply with requirements in Section 0249 "Selective Demolition" for salvaging demolition waste. B. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. C. Salvaged Items for Sale Not permitted on Project site. D. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

82 E. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. F. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. G. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. H. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. I. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. END OF SECTION 0749 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

83

84 SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Work:. Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and systems..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion..4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

85 .5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections..6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 0 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 0 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 0 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section "Demonstration and Training." CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

86 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 0. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 0 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion..7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 5. Submit final completion photographic documentation. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 0 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

87 .8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, according to room numbers on Drawings; in ascending order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file..9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 5 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

88 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. b. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. c. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. d. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. e. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. f. Remove labels that are not permanent. g. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. h. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. i. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. j. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. k. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. l. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 0749 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

89 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

90 SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals. B. Related Work:. Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals..3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system..4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

91 . Submit by uploading to web-based project software site. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 5 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 5 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 5 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. E. Comply with Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation..5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file..6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information:. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

92 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.".7 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

93 . Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures..8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures.. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 0. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. C. Descriptions: Include the following:. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

94 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification..9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below. C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

95 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals..0 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

96 B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

97

98 SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Demonstration and training video recordings..3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For instructor. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time..4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording..5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

99 .6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Architect..7 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Systems and equipment operation manuals. c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d. Product maintenance manuals. e. Project Record Documents. f. Identification systems. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

100 d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning. e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

101 .8 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location..9 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use..0 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 2 megapixels and capable of recording in full HD mode with vibration reduction technology.. Submit video recordings on thumb drive. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to Project Manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu. 3. File Names: Utilize file names based on name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications. 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the equipment demonstration and training recording that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project Manual table of contents: a. Name of Contractor/Installer. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

102 b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. address. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 5 minutes. a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 5 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment. D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.. Furnish additional portable lighting as required. E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone and/or dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. F. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

103

104 SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Work:. Section 0000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements..3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Salvage for Storage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner for storage. C. Salvage for Reuse or Reinstallation: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled..4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor..5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

105 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection..6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition..7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged..8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program..9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

106 B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations..0 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A0.6 and NFPA 24. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

107 . Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Refer to Division 2, Division 22, and Division 23 on Mechanical Drawings. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

108 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 30 minutes after flame-cutting operations. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Salvaged for Storage Items:. Clean salvaged items. 2. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 3. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site designated by Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Salvage for Reuse or Reinstallation:. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (9 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

109 C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 0249 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

110 SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. E. Samples: For vapor retarder. F. Welding certificates. G. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 0. Vapor retarders.. Semirigid joint filler. 2. Joint-filler strips. 3. Repair materials. H. Material test reports. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

111 I. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements..4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D.4/D.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:. ACI 30, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections through ACI 7, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 65/A 65M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 85/A 85M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

112 D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. E. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 85/A 85M, plain, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets. F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:. Portland Cement: ASTM C 50, Type II or Type I/II. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 68, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 00 or 20. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: inch (25 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 07/C 07M, Type II. 2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Polyolefin macro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 6/C 6M, Type III, to 2-/4 inches (25 to 57 mm) long.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals; MAC00. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

113 b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Tuf-Strand SF. c. FORTA Corporation; FORTA FERRO. d. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products); Strux 90/40. e. Nycon, Inc.; Nycon-XL-00. f. Propex Operating Company, LLC; Fibermesh 650. g. Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber Force VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Comply with ASTM E 745 Class "A", not less than 0 mils thick. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 82, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 7, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 35, Type, Class A. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 75, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 30. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

114 D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:. Minimum Compressive Strength: a. Foundations: 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa). b. Interior Slabs: 3,500 psi (24. MPa). c. Exterior Exposed: 4,500 psi (3.0 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: See structural General Notes. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (00 mm), plus or minus one inch, or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 00 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content For Exterior Exposed Concrete: 6 percent, plus or minus.0 percent at point of delivery for -inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer s recommended rate, but not less than rate indicated on structural plan drawing. 2.0 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2. CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 6/C 6M, and furnish batch ticket information.. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from -/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 30, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 7. C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. Chamfer shall be per drawings. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

115 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 643 and manufacturer's written instructions.. Lap joints 6 inches (50 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of /8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut /8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

116 weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 30. C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of /4 inch (6 mm) in one direction.. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

117 Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 0-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed /8 inch (3.2 mm). E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306. for cold-weather protection and ACI 30 for hotweather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h ( kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308., by one or a combination of the following methods:. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 2 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

118 manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.0 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

119

120 SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes structural steel and grout..3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.".4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. B. Moment Connections: Type PR, partially restrained..5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, and testing agency. D. Welding certificates. E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. F. Source quality-control reports..6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

121 B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. AWS states that welding qualifications remain in effect indefinitely unless welding personnel have not welded for more than six months or there is a specific reason to question their ability. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D./D.M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:. AISC AISC RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 4. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication..8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

122 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 572, Grade 50. B. Channels, Angles, Shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade C, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish. B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type with plain finish. C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type, hardened carbon-steel washers.. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating finish. D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 852, Type, heavyhex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbonsteel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.. Finish: Plain. E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 08, Grades 05 through 020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D., Type B. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

123 F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 554, Grade 36.. Configuration: Straight. 2. Finish: Plain. G. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 554, Grade 36, straight.. Finish: Plain. H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36.. Finish: Plain. I. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 08, Grade PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer and compatible with topcoat. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 07, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D./D.M and manufacturer's written instructions. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

124 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, diret-tension, or tensioned shear / bearing connections. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D./D.M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:. SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning" for interior and exterior Architectural Exposed Structural Steel. C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.8 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

125 . Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D. and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

126 D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D. and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, diret-tension, or tensioned shear / bearing connections. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D. for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D./D.M.. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D. and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

127 a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 65. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 64. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA for touching up shop-painted surfaces.. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

128 SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section I.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes, but not be limited to, the following:. Load-bearing punched channel studs. 2. "C" shaped load-bearing steel studs. 3. "C" shaped steel joists..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component design: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with AISI "Cold- Formed Steel Design Manual, current edition in accordance with OBC.. Provide all components and connections relative to size, spacing, gage location, and anchorage shown on architectural and structural drawings. Additional costs associated with an increase in the size, or gage of the studs from that shown on the drawings are not permitted. Provide design for all framing components and connections not specifically detailed including trusses, headers, jambs, supplemental bracing, etc. Any deviation from this design shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Use wind load values in accordance with governing Building Code or Factory Mutual Loss Prevention, taking into account elevation above grade and pressure coefficients. B. Fire-rated assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Prior to installation, submit the following:. Manufacturer s product information and installation instructions for each type of coldformed structural steel framing member and accessory. Submit certificate of material showing that materials meet or exceed the specified ASTM Standards. 2. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for all framing components and connections indicated on the contract drawings. For all framing components and connections not specifically detailed on the drawings including trusses, headers, jambs, etc., submit shop drawings and calculations stamped by an Engineer registered in the state the project is located. 3. Show layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing, COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

129 fabrication, and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work..5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings..6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2. METAL FRAMING A. System components: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runner (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Materials and finishes:. 6 ga. and heavier units: Fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; ASTM A ga. and lighter units: Fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A525 for minimum G60 coating. 4. Provide prime coated finish with one coat of shop-applied grey, zinc-chromate, or other similar rust-inhibitive primer. C. "C" shaped studs:. Manufacturer's standard load-bearing steel studs of size, shape, and gauge indicated, with.625" flange and flange return lip. Product shall be subject to compliance with requirements herein. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. b. Allied Structural Industries. c. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. d. Ceco Corp. e. Dale Industries, Inc. f. Inryco/Milcor. g. Marino Industries Corp. h. Monex Corp. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

130 D. Punched channel studs: E. Joists: i. U. S. Gypsum (USG).. Manufacturer's standard, factory punched, load-bearing steel studs of size, shape, and gauge indicated, with.375" flange. Product shall be subject to compliance with requirements herein. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. b. Allied Structural Industries. c. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. d. Ceco Corp. e. Dale Industries, Inc. f. Inryco/Milcor. g. Monex Corp. h. Wheeling Corrugating Co.. Manufacturers standard "C" shaped sections of size, shape and gauge indicated. Product shall be subject to compliance with requirements herein. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Alabama Metal Industries Crop. b. Allied Structural Industries. c. Ceco Corp. d. Dale Industries, Inc. e. Inryco/Milcor. f. Marino Industries Corp. g. Monex Corp. h. U. S. Gypsum (USG). I. Wheeling Corrugating Co. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer s written recommendations and requirements in this Section.. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. Comply with AWS D.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 4. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

131 penetrating jointed members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of /8 inch in 0 feet (:960) and as follows:. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus /8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of /8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Pre-installation conference: Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project site with installers of other work including door and window frames and mechanical and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. B. Runner tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power-driven fasteners, or 6" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. At track butt joints, anchor track to a common structural element. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. E. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

132 F. Installation of wall stud system: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. Load bearing studs shall be seated squarely to bear against track. Splices in axially loaded studs shall not be permitted. G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" sq. with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated. H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; and do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, equally spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 3'-4" o.c. Weld at each intersection. J. Installation of joists: Install level and plumb, complete with bracing and reinforcing as indicated on Drawings. Provide not less than '--/2" end bearing. K. Joists shall be located directly over wall studs or on lintels provided for load distribution. L. Reinforce ends with end clips, steel hangers, steel angle clips, steel stud section, end grain wood block, or as otherwise recommended by joists manufacturer. M. Where required, reinforce joists at interior support systems with single short length of joists section located directly over interior support, snap-on shoe, 30% side-piece lapped reinforcement, or other method recommended by joist manufacturer. N. Secure joists to interior support systems to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. O. Joist bridging shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations before application of load to joists. P. Field painting: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during handling and installation. Use compatible primer for prime coated surface; use galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces. Q. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. R. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. S. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

133 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

134 SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. B. Related Work:. Section "Structural Steel Framing.".3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following:. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. METAL FABRICATIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

135 .5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats..6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D./D.M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel.".7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. H. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 606-T6. I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 22 (ASTM B 22M), Alloy 6063-T6. J. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy F. METAL FABRICATIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

136 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 94 (ASTM F 94M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group (A). D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section Interior Painting." B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer compatible with topcoat.. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel and compatible with topcoat. D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Compatible with topcoat. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 87/D 87M. METAL FABRICATIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

137 H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 07/C 07M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately /32 inch ( mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, /8 by -/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (50- mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. METAL FABRICATIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

138 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 53/A 53M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 23/A 23M for other steel and iron products.. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.. Shop prime with primers specified in Section "Interior Painting. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA, "Paint Application Specification No. : Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with METAL FABRICATIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

139 edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA for touching up shop-painted surfaces.. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

140 SECTION DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Stainless-steel decorative railings..3 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection..4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not meet structural performance requirements..5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following:. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout and anchoring cement. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

141 . Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Welded connections. 4. Brazed connections. 5. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation..7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Welding certificates..8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:. AWS D.6/D.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.. Build mockups as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion..9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. DECORATIVE RAILINGS A. Stainless-Steel Decorative Railings:. Size and Profile: As shown on Drawings. 2. Finish: Custom finish to match existing. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

142 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kn/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kn) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 STAINLESS STEEL A. Pipe: ASTM A 32/A 32M, Grade TP 304. B. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20. C. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 07/C 07M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

143 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately /32 inch ( mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. F. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. G. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type welds; no evidence of a welded joint. H. Form changes in direction as follows:. By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing member. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

144 2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Custom Finish: Match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of /6 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed /4 inch in 2 feet (5 mm in 3 m). B. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (25 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

145 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

146 SECTION MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring. 3. Plywood backing panels..3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

147 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors..6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested..7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 9 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 9 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

148 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 0.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 320 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 684. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 9 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 5 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:. Concealed blocking. 2. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing. 3. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

149 C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS, Exposure, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (9-mm) nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 667. C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC0, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC93, or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

150 . Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 6 inches (406 mm) o.c. C. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:. Table , "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. G. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

151 B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

152 SECTION 0646A - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AU BON PAIN PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets, including metal trim and cabinet hardware. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Work:. Section Solid Surfacing Countertops..3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets..4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings:. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate architectural cabinets. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646A-

153 C. Samples for Verification: For the following:. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 0 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: 8 by 0 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each color, pattern, and surface finish. a. Provide edge banding on one edge. 3. Corner Pieces: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails and at exposed end pieces, 8 inches (450 mm) high by 8 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (50 mm) deep. 4. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish..6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product..7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Shall have completed work similar in design and extent indicated for this project. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.. Build mockups of typical architectural cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion..8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646A-2

154 .9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wetwork is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (6 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Grade: Premium. C. Type of Construction: As indicated on Drawings. D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: As indicated on Drawings. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated.. Manufacturer: Pionite 2. PL-: Color As indicated on Drawings. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS (0.048 inch). 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS (0.048 inch). 3. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.2 inch (3 mm) thick, color selected by Architect. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646A-3

155 . Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 0 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A Particleboard: ANSI A208., Grade M Core Material at Coffee Station: Exterior glued plywood (Marine Grade); standard particle board is not acceptable. 4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets as indicted on Drawings. B. Cabinet Hardware includes, but is not limited to, the following:. Hinges. 2. Pulls. 3. Catches. 4. Shelf Rests. 5. Drawer Slides. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646A-4

156 6. Liners. 7. Casters. 8. Door Locks. C. Exposed Hardware Finishes: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 5 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Metal Trim:. MTL- Kick Plate: As indicated on Drawings. 2. MTL-2 Accent Trim: As indicated on Drawings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646A-5

157 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) using concealed shims.. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 6 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 0646A PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646A-6

158 SECTION 0646A - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS STARBUCKS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets, including metal trim and cabinet hardware. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction..3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets..4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Shall have completed work similar in design and extent indicated for this project..6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646B-

159 .7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wetwork is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (6 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 5 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) using concealed shims. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646B-2

160 . Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 6 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 0646B PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0646B-3

161

162 SECTION B - PLASTIC PANELING - STARBUCKS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling. 2. Molding, adhesives and joint sealants..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes..4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 539. Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact.. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. PLASTIC PANELING - STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out B -

163 a. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 4. Color: White. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.. Color: Match panels. B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. D. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. E. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. PLASTIC PANELING - STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out B - 2

164 E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 2 inches wide.. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned.. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels. F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION B PLASTIC PANELING - STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out B - 3

165

166 SECTION JOINT SEALANTS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, joint sealants for the following applications:. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Joints at entrance framing and curtainwall framing. b. Joints between different materials. c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors. d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors. c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. d. Joints at wall surface penetrations. e. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Joints as indicated. 4. Seal joints at dissimilar materials such as millwork, casework, and similar materials abutting finish floor, walls, and ceilings..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in /2-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (50-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

167 C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. C. Warranties: For special warranties specified herein..6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer..7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates..8 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.. Warranty Period Silicone: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period Urethane: 0 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period Mildew Resistant: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period Latex: One year from date of Substantial Completion. JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

168 C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 248. B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 00/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 00 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 00/50, Use NT.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; 890 NST. b. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS 290. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem. 2. Location: Exterior. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product of one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Specified Technologies, Inc. JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

169 2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; SCS700 Sanitary. b. Pecora; 898 NST. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil Location: Interior. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex Location: Interior. 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.; SOF-Rod or comparable product by one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals Building Systems; Sonolastic Soft Backer Rod. b. ALCOT Plastics Limited; Soft Type. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 330, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

170 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

171 c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 93 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 93 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 93. JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

172 a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 0 tests for the first 000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X in ASTM C 93. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

173 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

174 SECTION DOUBLE ACTING SWING DOORS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Solid-core doors plastic-laminate faces. B. Related Work:. Section 09923B Interior Painting Starbucks..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 6. Elevations of each door design..4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons..5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. DOUBLE ACTING SWING DOORS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

175 .6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer s standard two-year warranty that products are free of defects in material and workmanship, guaranteeing to replace parts proven defective within two years after date of shipment to purchaser.. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than /4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.0 inch in a 3-inch span. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Eliason Corporation. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDIA Level and ANSI/SDI A250.4 physical performance level C (Standard Duty). 2.3 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid-Core Doors (DID 0086):. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on drawings. 2. Base Plates: 8-inch high 8 gauge stainless steel both sides; stainless steel edge trim and top hinge covers. 3. Core: ¾ exterior grade solid core made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. 4. Vertical Edges: Round vertical edges with 2-/8-inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted inch thick end closure or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates of 8 gauge stainless steel. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold or hot-rolled steel sheet. 7. Window Size: 9-inches by 4-inches. 8. Window Molding: Black rubber molding minimum inch thick. 9. Window Glazing: Clear Acrylic. B. Hardware and Accessories: DOUBLE ACTING SWING DOORS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

176 . Hinges: Manufacturer s standard double action hinges. a. Finish: Zinc coated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA W, and hardware templates. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Usually retain "Exterior Doors" Paragraph below to provide additional weather resistance. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard. DOUBLE ACTING SWING DOORS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

177 B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for firerated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.. Clearances: Provide /8 inch at heads, and jambs. Provide /8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Retain first subparagraph below for fire-rated doors or if doors are not factory fitted. a. Bevel non-fire-rated doors /8 inch in 2 inches (3-/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. C. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION DOUBLE ACTING SWING DOORS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

178 SECTION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Exterior and Interior manual-swing entrance doors and framing. B. Related Work:. Section Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls. 2. Section Glazing..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

179 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 2- inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances. C. Warranties: For special warranties specified herein..6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances to include in maintenance manuals..7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer..8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

180 . Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 424. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 350 Tuff Line, Medium Stile as manufactured by Kawneer. Entrance Doors must match existing profile and curtainwall finish. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Structural Loads:. Wind Loads: Provided by Owner. 2. Other Design Loads: Provided by Owner. C. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:. Entrance Doors: a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes.. Temperature Change: 20 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 80 deg F (00 deg C), material surfaces. 2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.. Door Construction: Door members nominal thickness 0.88-inch thick, extrudedaluminum tubular rail and stile members. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

181 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width for vertical stile and top rail; 0-inch for bottom rail. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.25 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. E. Materials:. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 22 (ASTM B 22M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2. Steel Reinforcement: a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 008/A 008M. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section.. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf (33 N)to set the door in motion and not more than 5 lbf (67 N) to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

182 2.5 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 23/A 23M or ASTM A 53/A 53M requirements. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30- mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. E. Rigid PVC Filler. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

183 D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.. At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.. Color and Gloss: Shall match existing curtainwall framing. Refer to Section Glazed Aluminum Curtainwalls. 2.9 DOOR HARDWARE A. As indicated on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General:. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

184 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection:. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install glazing as specified in Section "Glazing." F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

185

186 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazed aluminum curtain walls. B. Related Work:. Division 08 Section Aluminum Framed Entrances. 2. Section "Glazing"..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed aluminum curtain walls, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

187 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and field testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Warranties: For special warranties specified herein..6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 40 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality-control program..7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 40 for design and installation of curtain wall assemblies..8 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

188 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 424. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years extended warranty from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: C. Structural Loads: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.. Wind Loads: Provided by Owner. 2. Other Design Loads: Provided by Owner. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to /75 of clear span for spans up to 3 feet 6 inches (4. m) and to /240 of clear span plus /4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 3 feet 6 inches (4. m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (9. mm), whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to /360 of clear span or /8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller. 3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows: GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

189 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than /240 of clear span plus /4-inch (6. 35-mm) for spans greater than feet 8-/4 inches (3.6 m) or /75 times span, for spans less than feet 8-/4 inches (3.6 m). E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 50 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 0 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-airpressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 33 as follows:. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive windload design pressure, but not less than 5 lbf/sq. ft. (720 Pa). H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:. Temperature Change: 20 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 80 deg F (00 deg C), material surfaces. I. Structural-Sealant Joints:. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi (38 kpa). J. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structuralsealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

190 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 600 Wall System 2 as manufactured by Kawneer North America or product of existing curtainwall manufacturer. Curtainwall must match existing profile and finish. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain wall system, including framing, entrances, and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.3 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System 2: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural sealant on two sides. 3. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish. 4. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing.. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Materials:. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 22 (ASTM B 22M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 2.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 008/A 008M. 2.4 ENTRANCES A. Entrances: Comply with Section Aluminum Framed Entrances." GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

191 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 2.5 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 84, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtain-wall assembly indicated.. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 795 as manufactured by Dow Corning or comparable product by one of the following: a. G.E. Construction Sealants b. Tremco, Inc. 2. Color: Sealant must match existing exterior sealant. D. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use.. Color: Match structural sealant. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 23/A 23M or ASTM A 53/A 53M requirements. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 2 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

192 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows:. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior. 2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and vented to exterior. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat Mica-Flake System complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.. Color: Custom color to match existing exterior curtainwall framing. 2. Metallic appearance achieved by use of Mica Flakes in topcoat; no clear coat required. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 40 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

193 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General:. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection:. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install glazing as specified in Section "Glazing.". Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

194 SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS F. Install weatherseal sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances:. Plumb: /8 inch in 0 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); /4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 2.2 m). 2. Level: /8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); /4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 2.2 m). 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to /2 inch (2.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to /6 inch (.6 mm). b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from /2 to inch (2.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to /8 inch (3.2 mm). c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to /4 inch (6 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to /8 inch in 2 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); /2 inch (2.7 mm) over total length. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 40, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.. Test a minimum of four areas on each building facade. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing. C. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

195

196 SECTION GLAZING PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:. Curtainwall framing. 2. Aluminum entrance framing. B. Related Sections:. Division 08 Section Aluminum Framed Entrances. 2. Division 08 Section Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall..3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit..4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to 20 Ohio Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:. Design Wind Pressures: Provided by Owner. GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

197 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 5 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.. Temperature Change: 20 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 80 deg F (00 deg C), material surfaces..5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 2 inches (300 mm) square.. Insulating glass. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 2-inch (300-mm) lengths. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation..6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installers. B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, and insulating glass.. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. D. Warranties: Warranties specified herein..7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

198 C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." E. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation..8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change..9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)..0 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

199 . Warranty Period: 0 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.. Warranty Period: 0 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Products: Products specified here in are based on those as manufactured by Viracon.. Insulating Units shall match glazing at existing exterior curtainwall and doors. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 4. For ceramic-coated spandrel glass, comply with requirements for Condition B. 5. Provide tempered glass where indicated. a. GL-: Clear /4-inch tempered glass. b. GL-A: Ceramic-coated spandrel /4-inch tempered glass. ) Ceramic Frit: Selected by Architect. 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 290, and complying with other requirements specified.. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

200 B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article.. Insulating Unit (GL-2): -inch thick. a. Outboard Lite: /4-inch clear tempered glass (GL-) VE-2M with Low E coating on #2 surface. b. Air Space: /2-inch argon. c. Inboard Lite: ¼-inch clear tempered glass (GL-). d. Transmittance: ) Visible Light: 70%. 2) Solar Energy: 33%. 3) Ultra-Violet: 0%. e. Reflectance: ) Visible Light Exterior: %. 2) Visible Light Interior: 2%. 3) Solar Energy: 3%. f. ASHRAE U-Value: ) Winter Nighttime: 0.30 Btu/hr. x sq. ft. x F. 2) Summer Daytime: 0.26 Btu/hr. x sq. ft. x F. g. Shading Coefficient: h. Solar Factor (SHGC): Insulating Unit (GL-2A): -inch thick. a. Outboard Lite: /4-inch clear tempered glass (GL-) VE-2M with Low E coating on #2 surface. b. Air Space: /2-inch argon. c. Inboard Lite: ¼-inch clear tempered spandrel glass (GL-A). d. Transmittance: ) Visible Light: 2%. 2) Solar Energy: %. 3) Ultra-Violet: 0%. e. Reflectance: ) Visible Light Exterior: 0%. 2) Visible Light Interior: 0%. 3) Solar Energy: 0%. f. ASHRAE U-Value: ) Winter Nighttime: 0.25 Btu/hr. x sq. ft. x F. 2) Summer Daytime: 0.22 Btu/hr. x sq. ft. x F. GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

201 g. Shading Coefficient: h. Solar Factor (SHGC): i. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Tapes and Gaskets: As recommended by Aluminum framing manufacturer for application indicated. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General:. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range. 4. Structural silicone sealant is work of Section Glazed Aluminum Curtainwalls. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 00/50, use NT.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

202 b. GE Advanced Materials Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem. 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

203 other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (270 mm).. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide /8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

204 C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLAZING GCHI- First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

205

206 SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. B. Related Work:. Section Gypsum Board..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product..4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z20) hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

207 C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C 645 top track with 2-inch- (5-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 2 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, inch (.367-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum /2-inch- (3-mm-) wide flanges.. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than -/2 by -/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), inch- (.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch (0.836 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: inch (.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum /2-inch- (3-mm-) wide flanges.. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoatedsteel thickness of inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64/A 64M, Class zinc coating, soft temper, inch- (.59- mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of inch- (.2-mm-) diameter wire. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64/A 64M, Class zinc coating, soft temper, inch- (.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of inch- (.2-mm-) diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 64/A 64M, Class zinc coating, soft temper, 0.6 inch (4.2 mm) in diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, [in size indicated on Drawings. D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of inch (.367 mm) and minimum /2-inch- (3-mm-) wide flanges.. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):. Cold-Rolled Channels: inch (.367-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum /2-inch- (3-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (9 mm) deep. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

208 2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch (0.836 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch (0.836 mm). F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Ceiling Suspension c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

209 B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.. Single-Layer Application: 6 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 6 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum /2-inch (3-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring:. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (60 mm) o.c. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than /8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

210 3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within /8 inch in 2 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

211

212 SECTION GYPSUM BOARD PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Work:. Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing.".3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products:. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 2-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated..4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging..5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. GYPSUM BOARD GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

213 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 43 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 396/C 396M.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC c. National Gypsum Company d. United States Gypsum 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (5.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 396/C 396M.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC c. National Gypsum Company d. United States Gypsum 2. Thickness: /2 inch (2.7 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 396/C 396M gypsum board, tested according to ASTM C 629/C 629M. GYPSUM BOARD GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

214 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC c. National Gypsum Company d. United States Gypsum 2. Core: 5/8 inch (5.9 mm), Type X. 3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C 629/C 629M, meets or exceeds Level 2 requirements. 4. Indentation: ASTM C 629/C 629M, meets or exceeds Level requirements. 5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C 629/C 629M, meets or exceeds Level requirements. 6. Hard-Body Impact: ASTM C 69/C 629M, meets or exceeds Level requirements according to test in Annex A. 7. Long Edges: Tapered. 8. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 0 as rated according to ASTM D D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 396/C 396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC c. National Gypsum Company d. United States Gypsum 2. Core: 5/8 inch (5.9 mm), Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 0 as rated according to ASTM D TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: GYPSUM BOARD GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

215 a. Fry Reglet Corporation b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 22 (ASTM B 22M), Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape:. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 002 unless otherwise indicated.. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from to 0.2 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. GYPSUM BOARD GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

216 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than /6 inch (.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow /4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide /4- to /2-inch- (6.4- to 2.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. GYPSUM BOARD GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

217 I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 99 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application:. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application:. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: GYPSUM BOARD GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

218 . Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use where indicated. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:. Level : Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 3. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

219

220 SECTION 09303A - CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Quarry tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Crack isolation membrane..3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A08 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A37. apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A08 Series: ANSI A08.0, ANSI A08.02, ANSI A08.A, ANSI A08.B, ANSI A08.C, ANSI A08.4, ANSI A08.5, ANSI A08.6, ANSI A08.8, ANSI A08.9, ANSI A08.0, ANSI A08., ANSI A08.2, ANSI A08.3, ANSI A08.4, ANSI A08.5, ANSI A08.6, and ANSI A08.7, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs..4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.. Review requirements in ANSI A08.0 for substrates and for preparation by other trades..5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A -

221 B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Verification:. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 2 inches (300 mm) square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required..6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. C. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile..7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated but no fewer than 3 boxes for each type tile. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated..8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:. Installer is a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America..9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A37. for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 2

222 C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing..0 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof / crack isolation membrane from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:. Waterproofing / Crack isolation membrane. 2. Cementitious backer units. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A37. for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A08.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 3

223 C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type QT- Unglazed square-edged quarry tile.. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide #OQ42 Floor Tile manufactured by Daltile or comparable product acceptable to Architect. 2. Face Size: 4-inches by 8-inches. 3. Thickness: /2 inch (2.7 mm). 4. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive. 5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Grout Color: Custom color to match Architect s sample. B. Ceramic Tile Type CT-: Porcelain wall tile.. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide #B00 Retroactive manufactured by Crossville or comparable product acceptable to Architect. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: 3 by 2 inches. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 5/6-inch. 6. Face: Polished. 7. Tile Color: As indicated on Drawings. 8. Grout Color: Custom color to match Architect s sample. C. Ceramic Tile Type CT-2: Porcelain floor tile.. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wide Collection manufactured by Refin or comparable product acceptable to Architect. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: 2 by 24 inches. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 6. Face: As indicated. 7. Tile Color: As indicated on Drawing. 8. Grout Color: Custom color to match Architect's sample. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. a. CTB-2 Base: Battiscopa R; 2-7/8 by 24 inches. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 4

224 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A8.9 or ASTM C 325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.5 WATERPROOFING / CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer s standard product that complies with ANSA A8.0 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic TM AquaDefense. 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSA A8.4. For QT- and CT-2: MAPEI Ultraflex LFT. 2. For CT-: TEC Ultimate Large Tile Mortar. 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A8.7.. For CT-: TEC Power Grout 550. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A8.3.. For QT-: MAPEI Kerapoxy IEG CQ. 2. For CT-2: MAPEI Kerapoxy CQ. 3. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 40 and 22 deg F (60 and 00 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 5

225 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. C. Tile Sealer for CT- Wall Tile: Provide 5 Impregnator Penetrating Sealer as manufactured by Miracle Sealants Co. 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A08.0 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A08.0 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 6

226 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting material manufacturer. B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A08 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A08 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern shown on Drawings. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 7

227 2. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:. QT- Quarry Tile: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 2. CT- Porcelain Wall Tile: 3/6 inch x /4-inch. 3. CT-2 Porcelain Floor Tile: /6-inch. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. I. Tile Sealer: Apply tile sealer to CT- polished wall tile according to manufacturer's written instructions before installing grout. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A08. and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.5 WATERPROOF / CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install membrane to comply with ANSI A08.7 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 0 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 8

228 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09303A CERAMIC TILING AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 09303A - 9

229

230 SECTION 0953A - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:. Acoustical Panels: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (50-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES..6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A -

231 .7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed but not less than three (3) cartons..8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content..9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A - 2

232 . USG Corporation; MARS High NRC 90/30 #8839. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide panels as follows:. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form and Form Pattern: E (lightly textured); G (smooth). D. Color: White. E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 30. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than G. Edge/Joint Detail: USG FLB. H. Thickness: -inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (60 by 60 mm). J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 2 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (FOR ACT-) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:. USG Corporation; Donn Centricitee DXT. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. C. Narrow-Face, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, hot-dip galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 9/6-inch- (5-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel. 4. Color: Custom color to match Benjamin Moore Dill Pickle # ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A - 3

233 2.5 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT-2) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:. USG Corporation; MARS Healthcare 75/35 #8669. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide panels as follows:. Type and Form: Type IV, Form and Form Pattern: E (lightly textured); G (smooth). D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35. G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. I. Thickness: 3/4-inches. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (60 by 60 mm). K. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 2 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (FOR ACT-2) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:. USG Corporation; Donn DXLA. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. C. Wide-Face, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 5/6-inch- (24- mm-) wide with painted aluminum cap.. Structural Classification: Intermediate. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Color: Flat White 050. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A - 4

234 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 52 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to ASTM B 633, Class SC (mild) service condition. b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group Alloy 304 or 36. c. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 64 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 0 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 90, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 64/A 64M, Class zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.06-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire unless otherwise indicated. C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/6-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts. 2.8 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:. USG Corporation; Wall Angle M9 for ACT-. 2. USG Corporation; Wall Angle M7A for ACT-2. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A - 5

235 B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspensionsystem runners.. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For ACT- Suspension System Custom Color: Shall match Benjamin Moore Dill Pickle # For ACT-2 Suspension System Custom Color: Flat White. 4. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product of one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Specified Technologies, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A - 6

236 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 0. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 6 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A - 7

237 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated assembly. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of /8 inch in 2 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of /8 inch in 2 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 0953A ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 0953A - 8

238 SECTION RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Thin-set, epoxy-resin terrazzo flooring. 2. Precast epoxy-resin terrazzo units. B. Related Work:. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.. Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to, the following: a. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. c. Review special terrazzo designs and patterns..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo installation requirements. Include plans, sections, component details, and relationship to other work. Show layout of the following:. Divider strips. 2. Control-joint strips. 3. Accessory strips. 4. Abrasive strips. 5. Stair treads and risers. RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

239 6. Precast terrazzo jointing and edge configurations. 7. Terrazzo patterns. C. Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each terrazzo Sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and aggregate types, sizes, and proportions. Prepare Samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the Work, in sizes indicated below:. Terrazzo: 6-inch- (50-mm-) square Samples. 2. Precast Terrazzo: 6-inch- (50-mm-) square Samples including abrasive strip. 3. Accessories: 6-inch- (50-mm-) long Samples of each exposed strip item required including divider strips..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Material Certificates: For each type of terrazzo material or product. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. D. Preinstallation moisture-testing reports..6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For terrazzo to include in maintenance manuals..7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by terrazzo manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's products..8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any. B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

240 .9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting terrazzo installation. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with precast terrazzo by field measurements before fabrication. C. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during terrazzo installation. D. Close spaces to traffic during terrazzo application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. E. Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary terrazzo thinset and precast materials from manufacturer of existing products in existing building. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Source Limitations for Aggregates: Obtain each color, grade, type, and variety of granular materials from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2.3 EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO (ERT-X) A. Epoxy-Resin Terrazzo (ERT-X): Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for matrix and aggregate proportions and mixing.. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thin-set epoxy-resin terrazzo flooring to match existing in building. B. Mix Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. C. Materials: RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

241 . Moisture-Vapor-Emission-Control Membrane: Two-component, high-solids, highdensity, low-odor, epoxy-based membrane-forming product produced by epoxy terrazzo manufacturer that reduces moisture emission from concrete substrate to not more than 3 lb of water/000 sq. ft. (.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. 2. Substrate-Crack-Suppression Membrane: Product of terrazzo-resin manufacturer, having minimum 20 percent elongation potential according to ASTM D 42. a. Reinforcement: Fiberglass scrim. 3. Primer: Manufacturer's product recommended for substrate and use indicated. 4. Epoxy-Resin Matrix: Match existing in building. 5. Aggregates: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no deleterious or foreign matter. 6. Finishing Grout: Resin based. 2.4 PRECAST EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO (PERT-X) A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide precast epoxy-resin terrazzo treads and risers to match existing in building.. Refer to Drawings for size and profile. B. Precast Terrazzo Units (PERT-X): Minimum 3/4-inch (9-mm) thick, epoxy terrazzo units. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for fabricating precast units in sizes and profiles indicated. Reinforce units as required by unit sizes, profiles, and thicknesses and as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed-to-view edges and reveals to match face finish. Ease exposed edges to /8-inch (3.2-mm) radius.. Color, Pattern, and Finish: Match adjacent poured-in-place terrazzo flooring. 2.5 STRIP MATERIALS A. Thin-Set Divider Strips: L-type angle in depth required for topping thickness indicated.. Material: Match existing First Floor in building. 2. Top Width: Match existing First Floor in building. B. Control-Joint Strips: Separate, double L-type angles, positioned back to back, that match material and color of divider strips and in depth required for topping thickness indicated. C. Abrasive Strips: Three-line abrasive inserts at nosings. Silicon carbide in epoxy-resin binder and set in channel. Match existing.. Width: As indicated. 2. Depth: As required by terrazzo thickness. 3. Length: As indicated. 4. Color: Match existing. RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

242 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Strip Adhesive: Epoxy-resin adhesive recommended by adhesive manufacturer for this use. B. Anchoring Devices:. Strips: Provide mechanical anchoring devices or adhesives for strip materials as recommended by manufacturer and as required for secure attachment to substrate. 2. Precast Terrazzo: Provide mechanical anchoring devices as recommended by fabricator for proper anchorage and support of units for conditions of installation and support. C. Patching and Fill Material: Terrazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. D. Joint Compound: Terrazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. E. Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with ph factor between 7 and 0 that is biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by sealer manufacturer for use on terrazzo type indicated. F. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not affect terrazzo color or physical properties; and is recommended by sealer manufacturer.. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D Acid-Base Properties: With ph factor between 7 and 0. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances, have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, and curing compounds, that might impair terrazzo bond. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for terrazzo application. B. Concrete Slabs:. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with terrazzo. RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

243 a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. b. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to terrazzo manufacturer's written instructions. c. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to terrazzo manufacturer's written instructions. C. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Preinstallation Moisture Testing:. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests. 2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (8.6 sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Moisture-Vapor-Emission Test: Maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/000 sq. ft. (.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours when tested according to ASTM F 869 using anhydrous calcium chloride. b. Relative Humidity Test: Maximum 75 percent relative humidity measurement when tested according to ASTM F 270 using in-situ probes. 3. Proceed with terrazzo installation only after concrete substrates pass moisture testing or after installation of moisture-vapor-emission-control membrane on substrate areas that fail testing. E. Moisture-Vapor-Emission-Control Membrane: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.. Install concrete substrates that fail preinstallation moisture testing. F. Substrate-Crack-Suppression Membrane: Install to isolate and suppress substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions.. Prepare and prefill substrate cracks with membrane material. 2. Install membrane to produce full substrate coverage in areas to receive terrazzo. 3. Reinforce membrane with fiberglass scrim. G. Protect other work from water and dust generated by grinding operations. Control water and dust to comply with environmental protection regulations.. Erect and maintain temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit water damage and dust migration and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions during installation. 3.3 EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO INSTALLATION A. Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo and accessory installation. RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

244 B. Strip Materials:. Divider and Control-Joint Strips: a. Locate divider strips in locations indicated. b. Install control-joint strips in locations indicated. c. Install strips in adhesive setting bed without voids below strips, or mechanically anchor strips as required to attach strips to substrate, as recommended by strip manufacturer. C. Apply primer to terrazzo substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Place, rough grind, grout, cure grout, fine grind, and finish terrazzo according to manufacturer's written instructions.. Installed Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) nominal. 2. Terrazzo Finishing: Ensure that matrix components and fluids from grinding operations do not stain terrazzo by reacting with divider and control-joint strips. a. Rough Grinding: Grind with 24-grit or finer stones or with comparable diamond abrasives. Follow initial grind with 60/80-grit stones or with comparable diamond abrasives. b. Grouting: Before grouting, clean terrazzo with water, rinse, and allow to dry. Apply and cure epoxy grout. c. Fine Grinding: Schedule fine grinding for after completion of construction operations that may mar or contaminate finished surfaces. ) Grind with 80 or finer grit carborundum stones, removing grout from surface. 2) After grout removal, grind floors with 20 grit carborundum stones, followed by finish polish using 50 diamond pad or screen mesh. 3) Use of sand during fine grinding operations is not permitted. 4) Upon completion, terrazzo shall exhibit a smooth, polished finish, showing at least percent of marble chips. 3. Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in terrazzo surface from level to /4 inch in 0 feet (6.4 mm in 3 m); noncumulative. 3.4 PRECAST TERRAZZO INSTALLATION A. Install precast terrazzo units using method recommended in writing by NTMA and manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not install units that are chipped, cracked, discolored, or improperly finished. C. Seal joints between units with joint compound matching precast terrazzo matrix. D. Install abrasive strips with surface of abrasive strip positioned /6 inch (.6 mm) higher than terrazzo surface. RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

245 3.5 REPAIR A. Cut out and replace terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate. Cut out terrazzo areas in panels defined by strips and replace to match adjacent terrazzo, or repair panels according to NTMA's written recommendations, as approved by Architect. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning:. Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas. 2. Wash surfaces with cleaner according to NTMA's written recommendations and manufacturer's written instructions; rinse surfaces with water and allow them to dry thoroughly. B. Sealing:. Seal surfaces according to NTMA's written recommendations. 2. Apply sealer according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions. C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure that terrazzo is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

246 SECTION A - WALL COVERINGS AU BON PAIN PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Vinyl wall covering..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement, seams and termination points. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish specified, full width by 36-inch- (94-mm-) long in size.. Wall-Covering Sample: From same production run to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of fabric. D. Product Schedule: For wall coverings..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency..6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. WALL COVERINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A -

247 .7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length to equal to 5 percent of amount installed but not less than one () full roll..8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended for occupants after Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING (WC-) A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide REED as manufactured by Chilewich Contract. B. Description: Provide mildew-resistant products in rolls from same production run and complying with the following:. ASTM F 793 for wall coverings. a. Category: VI, Type III, Commercial Serviceability. C. Total Weight: 25 oz/sq. yd. WALL COVERINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A - 2

248 D. Width: 72-inches. E. Backing: Scrim fabric. F. Thickness: inch thick. G. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Ash. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements and recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for intended substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. E. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. WALL COVERINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A - 3

249 3.3 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. D. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage. E. Match pattern 72 inches (830 mm) above the finish floor. F. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlaps or gaps between strips. G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION A WALL COVERINGS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A - 4

250 SECTION B - WALL COVERINGS STARBUCKS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Owner-Furnished Materials: Vinyl wall covering..3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals..4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length to equal to 5 percent of amount installed but no fewer than one roll..5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended for occupants after Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. VINYL WALL COVERING (DID 44) A. Description: Provide products in rolls from same production run. WALL COVERINGS STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out B -

251 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 4. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 5. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. WALL COVERINGS STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out B - 2

252 3.3 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.. For solid-color, even-texture, or random-match wall coverings, reverse every other strip. D. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage. E. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal seams are not permitted. G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlaps or gaps between strips. H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION B WALL COVERINGS STARBUCKS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out B - 3

253

254 SECTION STONE WALL FACING PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes dimension stone facing on interior walls..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone facing, including dimensions and profiles of stone units.. Show locations and details of joints both within stone facing and between stone facing system and other finish materials. 2. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern. C. Samples for Verification:. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 2 inches (300 mm) square. Include three or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics in completed Work. 2. For each color of grout required..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Material Test Reports:. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous three years. STONE WALL FACING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

255 .6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stone facinging to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products..7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate stone facing similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing stone facing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance..8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. 2. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are installed. C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. D. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp..9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation material manufacturers, but not less than 50 deg F (0 deg C) during installation and for seven days after completion. B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone facing by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. STONE WALL FACING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

256 .0 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry and similar items to be used by stone facing Installer for anchoring and supporting stone facing. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Time delivery and installation of stone facing to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to stone facing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each. 2.2 GRANITE (ST-) A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 65/C 65M. B. Description: Uniform, black stone to match stone in existing building. C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide The Cleveland Marble Mosaic Company; Granite Cleveland Black Polished A. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 50/C 50M, Type I or Type II. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate: ASTM C 44. D. Water: Potable. 2.4 GROUT A. Grout Colors: Match existing in building. B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A8.6, packaged.. Grout Type: Unsanded. STONE WALL FACING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

257 2.5 STONE ACCESSORIES A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness. B. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. C. Sealant: As recommended in writing by stone fabricator for application indicated. 2.6 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. B. Fabricate stone facing in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite." C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association.. Where items are installed with adhesive or where stone edges are visible in the finished work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of stone if necessary. 2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. 2.7 MIXES A. Mortar, General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set. B. Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.. Mix Proportions: part portland cement and 2-/2 to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2-/4 to 3 times the volume of cement and lime. STONE WALL FACING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

258 C. Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive stone facing and conditions under which stone facing will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone facing. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone facing. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING STONE, GENERAL A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. B. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work. D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. E. Erect stone units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.. Keep expansion joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and other rigid materials. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), /4 inch (6 mm) maximum. B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed /8 inch in 0 feet (3 mm in 3 m), /4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), 3/8 inch (0 mm) maximum. STONE WALL FACING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

259 C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls and partitions, do not exceed /8 inch in 0 feet (3 mm in 3 m), /4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), 3/8 inch (0 mm) maximum. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus /8 inch (3 mm). E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus /6 inch (.5 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed /32-inch (0.8-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STONE FACING A. Grout joints after setting stone. 3.5 GROUTING JOINTS A. Grout stone to comply with ANSI A Use unsanded grout mixture for joints /8 inch (3 mm) and narrower. B. Remove temporary shims before grouting. C. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone facing as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone facing of the following description:. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective stone facing. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Stone facing and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Stone facing not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone facing that matches approved Samples and mockups, complies with other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone facing no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. STONE WALL FACING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

260 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage. B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces. END OF SECTION STONE WALL FACING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

261

262 SECTION INTERIOR PAINTING AU BON PAIN PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:. Existing ferrous metal. 2. Existing structural steel. 3. New and existing gypsum board..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations..4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.. Paint: Five (5) percent, but not less than gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied..5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). INTERIOR PAINTING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

263 . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily..6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (0 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Sherwin- Williams Company (The) or comparable product by Benjamin Moore & Co. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. PDCA Standards: Products shall comply with PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America Standards. B. Material Compatibility:. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As scheduled on Drawings. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from INTERIOR PAINTING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

264 previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:. Gypsum Board: 2 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "PDCA Manual. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "PDCA Manual.". Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. INTERIOR PAINTING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

265 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. General: Interior paint systems are listed below. Paint systems are based on products of Sherwin-Williams Paints unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Drawings locations. Substrates include, but are not limited to, those scheduled.. Refer to Drawings for additional surfaces to receive paint. INTERIOR PAINTING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

266 B. Colors: Match colors as scheduled on Drawings. C. Paint Systems: Interior Substrate. Existing ferrous metal doors and frames and existing structural steel Paint System Prep: Abrade existing coatings and test for adhesion and compatibility. If adhesion is not adequate, apply coat of Extreme Bond primer. Comply with paint manufacturer s written recommendations for existing substrates. Primer: Omit. Finish: 2 coats ProIndustrial Pre-Catalyzed waterbased epoxy. K46-50 Series mils dft per coat. 2. Existing gypsum board walls Prep: Abrade existing coatings and test for adhesion and compatibility. If adhesion is not adequate, apply coat of Extreme Bond primer. Comply with paint manufacturer s written recommendations for existing substrates. Primer: Omit. Finish: 2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Egshell, B mils dft per coat. 3. Existing gypsum board ceilings Prep: Abrade existing coatings and test for adhesion and compatibility. If adhesion is not adequate, apply coat of Extreme Bond primer. Comply with paint manufacturer s written recommendations for existing substrates. Primer: Omit Finish: 2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B mils dft per coat. 4. New gypsum board walls 5. New gypsum board ceilings 6. New gypsum board ceilings in food prep/work room areas INTERIOR PAINTING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out Primer: coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer B28W mils dft. Finish: 2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg- Shel, B mils dft per coat. Primer: coat ProMar 200 Zero Voc Latex Primer, B28W 2600 mils. Finish: 2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B mils dft per coat. Primer: coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28 mils dft. Finish: 2 coats ProIndustrial Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy,

267 mils dft/coat, Eg-Shel. 7. Overhead uninsulated pipes and galvanized metal 8. Overhead gypsum based fireproofing 9. Overhead insulated materials Prep: SSPC-SP Solvent Clean. Primer: coat SW ProCryl Universal Metal Primer, B mils dft. Finish: 2 coats SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Flat B30W2600 mils dft per coat. Finish: -2 light mist coats (as needed) SW B42W8 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Dryfall 2.3 mils dft per coat. NOTE: Coating is for "coloring" purposes only and should not be applied heavyily enough to saturate the fireproofing. Over application could cause delamination of the fireproofing material. Primer: light coat of SW Extreme Bond Primer B5W0050 (not to exceed.9 mils DFT). Finish: coat SW B42W8 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Dryfall mils dft. NOTE: Coating system is not designed for extreme expansion. If the insulation flexes greater than the coating allows it may result in cracking or delamination. END OF SECTION INTERIOR PAINTING GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

268 SECTION FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually operated, glass-panel partitions..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For operable glass-panel partitions.. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, numbered panel installation sequence, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 3. Pass door including hardware. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 2. Glass: Units 2 inches (300 mm) square. 3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of operable glass-panel partition. C. Product Test Reports: For each operable glass-panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

269 D. Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty specified herein..6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable glass-panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals.. In addition to items specified in "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components..7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer..8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels..9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable glass-panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable glass-panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. OPERABLE GLASS PANELS A. Operable Glass Panels: Frameless aluminum glass-panel partition system, including panels, suspension system, operators, and accessories. FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

270 . Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model FSW Frameless Folding System as manufactured by Nana Wall Systems Inc. or other acceptable to Architect. B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, continuously hinged panels. C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze operable glass panels in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. D. Glass and Glazing: As follows:. Safety Glass Standard for Partition Panels: Glass products complying with testing requirements in 6 CFR 20, Category II, or ANSI Z97., Class A. a. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type I (transparent flat glass), Class (clear), Quality-Q3. b. Glass Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for indicated requirements. c. Glass Vertical Edge: Flat butt edge. 2. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system as indicated. E. Dimensions: Fabricate operable glass-panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.. Panel Width: As indicated. F. Panel Weight: 8 lb/sq. ft. (40 kg/sq. m) maximum. G. Panel Frame Thickness: Nominal dimension of -7/6 inches H. Top Rail Width: 3-5/6-inch. I. Bottom Rail Width: 3-5/6-inch J. Kick Plate: 0-inch, ADA compliant. K. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 22 (ASTM B 22M) for extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use. a. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum. L. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable glass-panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

271 2. Quick release floor bolt with spring loaded security feature M. Panel Frame Finishes:. Exposed Metal: Match existing curtainwall custom color. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tracks: Aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable glass-panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable glass-panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.0 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels. C. Aluminum Finish: Black. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pass Doors: Swinging door built into and matching panel materials and construction finish and thickness, complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges finished to match other exposed hardware.. Accessibility Standard: Fabricate doors to comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "200 ADA Standards for Accessible Design." 2. Single Pass Door: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Pass-Door Hardware: Equip pass door with the following: a. Panic Push-Bar Top Latch Handle: Model AD-00. b. Material: Round stainless steel tubing, -/4-inch diameter; No. 4 satin finish. c. Pull Handle: Model F Style, finish to match panic handle. d. Cylinder Lock: Cylinder lock housing for mechanical strike. Mount housing at panic bar height. Lock shall be operable from exterior side of door. e. Keys: Furnish three (3) keys. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, floor levelness, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable glass-panel partitions. FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

272 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install operable glass-panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. B. Install panels in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable glass-panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 2 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable-partition operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable glass-panel partitions. END OF SECTION FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

273

274 SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers..3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.. Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to, the following: a. Schedules and coordination requirements..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets..5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Special warranty specified herein..6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals..7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

275 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 0. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six (6) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 0, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsens Manufacturing Company; MP5A or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International. b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. d. Nystrom, Inc. e. Potter Roemer LLC. 2. Valves: Manufacturer s standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer s standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 0, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated red baked-enamel finish. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

276 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International. b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. c. Nystrom, Inc. d. Potter Roemer LLC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 0446 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

277

278 SECTION 23640A - STONE COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes stone countertops and back splash..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory and manufactured product. B. Shop Drawings:. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Show locations and details of joints. 3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern. C. Samples for Verification: For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 2 inches (300 mm) square.. Include three (3) or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in the completed Work..4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator..5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products..6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. STONE COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 23640A -

279 B. Installer Qualifications: Shall have completed work similar in design and extent indicated for this project..7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. 2. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation..8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. MARBLE (ST-2) A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503/C 503M. Group A. B. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained, white stone with only slight veining. C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, White Carrara Marble. D. Cut: Fleuri. E. Finish: Polished. 2.2 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A8.3.. Provide adhesive recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer for application indicated. C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A8.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy.. Provide grout recommended in writing by grout manufacturer for application indicated. STONE COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 23640A - 2

280 D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing that will not stain the stone it is applied to.. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Manufacturer s standard sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Plywood Subtops: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. F. Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. G. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. 2.3 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that may impair structural integrity, function, or appearance.. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect. B. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 2. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 4. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. 5. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased unless otherwise indicated. 6. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts. C. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 2.4 STONE COUNTERTOPS A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VII." STONE COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 23640A - 3

281 B. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than -/4 inches (32 mm). Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness. C. Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at top. D. Splashes: Provide 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) thick backsplashes unless otherwise indicated.. Height: As indicated. 2. Top-Edge Detail: As indicated. E. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated.. Joint Type: Grouted, /6 inch (.5 mm) in width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone countertops. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone countertops. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installing stone countertops, clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives and rinse with clear water. Allow stone to dry before installing. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: Do not exceed /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), /4 inch (6 mm) maximum. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Install countertops over subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. B. Do not cut stone in field unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment. STONE COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 23640A - 4

282 C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. D. Space joints with /6-inch (.5-mm) gap for filling with grout. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. E. Install backsplashes by adhering to countertops with stone adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Leave /6-inch (.5-mm) gap between splashes and wall for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing. F. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A08.0. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool grout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool. G. Apply sealant to gaps specified for filling with sealant. Remove temporary shims before applying sealant. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description:. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective countertops. 3. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 4. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone countertops no fewer than six days after completion of sealant installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that may damage stone. E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 23640A STONE COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out 23640A - 5

283

284 SECTION A - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material wall trim..3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop and wall trim materials. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops and wall trim. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:. Countertop and wall trim material, 6 inches (50 mm) square..4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator..5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A -

285 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Shall have completed work similar in material, design indicated for this project, and have resulted in successful in-service performance. C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution.. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion..7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete..8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS (SSM) A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-.. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company; Corian. 2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: a. SSM-: Not Used. b. SSM-2: As indicated on Drawings. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208., Grade M-2. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A - 2

286 2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards.". Grade: Premium. B. Countertops: /2-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. C. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field with joints at locations indicated.. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints where indicated. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint. D. Cutouts and Holes:. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. 2. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 2.3 TRIM FABRICATION A. Fabricate trim to size and profile shown on Drawings. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: As recommended by solid surfacing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A - 3

287 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of /8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), /4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed /64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. E. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. F. Install wall trim as shown on Drawings. G. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with sealant manufacturer s written instructions. END OF SECTION A SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS AU BON PAIN GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out A - 4

288 SECTION ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART - GENERAL. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:. Roll-up rail mats. 2. Recessed frames. B. Related Work:. Section Cast-In-Place Concrete..3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames..4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames. B. Shop Drawings:. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices. 2. Divisions between mat sections. 3. Perimeter floor frames. C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:. Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat. 2. Tread Rail: Sample of each type and color. 3. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color. ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

289 .5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals..6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.. Resilient-Tile Entrance Mats: Full-size tile units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 0 units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL A. Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:. Uniform floor load of 50,000 lb/sq.ft. 2. Wheel load of 350 lb (59 kg) per wheel. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's "200 ADA Standards for Accessible Design." 2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS (WM-) A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mattrac Roll Up Mat manufactured by Babcock Davis or comparable product acceptable to Architect. B. Roll-up, Vinyl-Rail Hinged Mats: Vinyl-acrylic tread rails.875-inch wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick, with slotted or perforated hinges.. Tread Inserts: Crimped solution-dyed 600 denier polypropylene fibers tufted into woven double backing, mechanically secured to tread rails. 2. Colors: Match existing in building. 3. Rail Color: Match existing in building. 4. Hinges: Vinyl. 5. Mat Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 FRAMES A. Recessed Frames: Manufacturer's standard extrusion.. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 22 (ASTM B 22M), Alloy 606-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52. ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

290 a. Color: Match existing in building. 2. Frame: Level bed mechanically fastened BFT38LBM. 2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Provide concrete fill and grout equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for recessed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill thickness. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install recessed mat frames and mats to comply with manufacturer's written instructions so that tops of mats will be flush with adjoining finished flooring. Set mats with tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.. For installation in terrazzo flooring areas, allow for grinding and polishing of terrazzo without grinding surface of recessed frames. Coordinate with other trades as required. ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

291 2. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location, and secure attachment of frames. 3. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level. 4. Delay setting mats until construction traffic has ended. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 2483 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES GCHI First Floor Tenants Fit-Out

292 E DARHRICFL.WEBON930DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT BID/PERMIT SET OCTOBER 4, 207 ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 CODE DATA CALLOUT SYBMOLS PROJECT NOTES INDEX OF DRAWINGS 0/4/207 :38:07 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt PROJECT DESCRIPTION: TO REVISE SUITE 03/04 FROM MEETING SPACE (MERCANTILE M AND ASSEMBLY A-3) TO RESTAURANT (ASSEMBLY A-2) TO DEMOLISH EXISTING SUITE 05 BUILD OUT TO PREPARE FOR NEW FUTURE TENANT BUILD OUT SITE INFORMATION: PP NO: (7,8,9 20, 24,25, 36) SUITES 03/04(FIRST FLOOR) ST. CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 44 APPLICABLE CODES: 20 OHIO BUILDING CODE W/207 UPDATES 20 OHIO MECHANICAL CODE W/206 UPDATES 20 OHIO PLUMBING CODE W/207 UPDATES 204 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE 20 OHIO FIRE CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY CODE CODE SUMMARY: GENERAL EXISTING BUILDING DATA (ENTIRE BUILDING) SECTION 508 MIXED USE AND OCCUPANCY YES MIXED OCCUPANCIES (508.3) A-2, A-3, B, N, S-, S-2 NON-SEPARATED OCCUPANCIES ( ) A-2, A-3, B, M, S- SEPARATED OCCUPANCIES ( ) S-2 SECTION 602 TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION B SECTION 903 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PROVIDED SECTION 907 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PROVIDED TENANT SPACE DATA (TENANT SPACE ONLY) SECTION 302 PROPOSED SPACE USE AND OCCUPANCY GROUP SUITE 03 PROPOSED USE A-2 TENANT IMPROVEMENT AREA 2,67 SF VESTIBULE 04 PROPOSED USE A-2 TENANT IMPROVEMENT AREA 25 SF SUITE 05 PROPOSED USE A-2 TENANT IMPROVEMENT AREA 2,042 SF SECTION INCIDENTAL USE AREAS 0 SF SECTION ACCESSORY OCCUPANCY 0 SF TABLE INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH REQUIREMENT BY OCCUPANCY A-2 EXIT PASSAGEWAYS AND EXIT ENCLOSURE B CORRIDORS B ROOMS AND ENCLOSED SPACES C EXIT TENANT SPACE AREA (SF): 4,58 OCC LOAD: 30 SF/OCC # OF OCC: 39 OCC NOTE: NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS AND EGRESS PATTERN FROM 202 BASE BUILDING DRAWINGS. EGRESS LOAD INCLUDES OCCUPANTS OF ENTIRE LEVEL. FIRST FLOOR LIFE SAFETY PLAN - EXISTING /6" = '-0" BUILDING FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS TABLE 60 FIRE RESISTANT RATING REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS ELEMENT REQUIRED PROVIDED STRUCTURAL FRAME 2 HOURS 2 HOURS (EXISTING) NON-BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS EXTERIOR 0 HOUR 0 HOUR INTERIOR 0 HOUR 0 HOUR TABLE 602 FIRE RATING OF EXTERIOR WALL BASED ON SEPARATION DISTANCE X > 30'-0" 0 HOUR 0 HOUR SEC 020. VERTICAL EXIT ENCLOSURES 2 HOURS 2 HOURS (EXISTING) TABLE INCIDENTAL USE AREAS STORAGE ROOMS OVER 00 SF HOUR 2 HOURS OCCUPANCY LOAD CALCULATIONS EXISTING OCCUPANT LOADS FROM 20 BASE BUILDING DRAWINGS: SUITES 03/04, 05 USE OCC. LOAD AREA # OF OCC. MERCANTILE 30 SF/OCC 4,58 SF 39 PUBLIC CIR USE OCC. LOAD AREA # OF OCC. CIRCULATION 0 SF/OCC 2,245 SF 0 TOTAL NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS: 39 PROPOSED OCCUPANT LOADS: SUITE 03 USE OCC. LOAD AREA # OF OCC. ASSEMBLY 5 SF/OCC MERCANTILE 30 SF/OCC KITCHEN 200 SF/OCC 27 2 VESTIBULE 04 USE OCC. LOAD AREA # OF OCC. CIRCULATION 0 SF/OCC 230 SF 0 SUITE 05 USE OCC. LOAD AREA # OF OCC. ASSEMBLY 5 SF/OCC,027 SF 69 MERCANTILE 30 SF/OCC 242 SF 9 KITCHEN 200 SF/OCC 58 SF 4 PUBLIC CIR USE OCC. LOAD AREA # OF OCC. CIRCULATION 0 SF/OCC,980 SF 0 ASSEMBLY 5 SF/OCC TOTAL NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS: 9 NET GAIN: 52 EXIT AU BON PAIN KITCHEN 27 SF 200 SF/OCC. 2 OCC. 03 AU BON PAIN PRODUCTS 652 SF 30 SF/OCC. 22 OCC. EXIT VESTIBULE 230 SF 00 SF/OCC. 3 OCC. 05 STARBUCKS SEATING 027 SF 5 SF/OCC. 69 OCC. 2 D 02 FUTURE TENANT 82 SF 30 SF/OCC. 40 OCC DN EXIT TRAVEL DISTANCE TO EXIT EXIT # ## PLUMBING FIXTURES REQUIREMENT P = FIXTURES PROVIDED PER LEVEL R = FIXTURES REQUIRED PER OBC TABLE a. REQUIRED COUNT TO INCLUDE ONE UNISEX FIXTURE ON SAME FLOOR AND TWO FIXTURES ON FLOOR ABOVE. b. PER OPC SECTION WHERE WATER IS SERVED IN RESTAURANTS..., DRINKING FOUNTAINS SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED. NOTE: NON-SIMULULTANEOUS OCCUPANCIES EXCLUDED FROM OCCUPANT LOADS FOR COUNTS BELOW. STORAGE AND SUPPORT WILL ALSO BE CONSIDERED NON-SIMULTANEOUS OCCUPANCIES FOR THIS PROJECT. OCCUPANCY SUBCATEGORY 45 ASSEMBLY A-3 (EXHIBITION/MEETING) ORIGINAL OCC. LOAD PROPOSED REVISED OCC. LOAD WATER CLOSETS MALE P R (a) FEMALE P 8 R UNISEX P R LAVATORIES MALE P 5 R (a) FEMALE P 7 R UNISEX P (a) R DRKG FTNS P 2 R (b) FIRST FLOOR LIFE SAFETY PLAN - PROPOSED /6" = '-0" ASSEMBLY A-2 (DINING) 4 EXIT MERCANTILE SHOPS BUSINESS BUSINESS TOTAL 4002 SEATING 22 SF 5 SF/OCC. 9 OCC. 03 AU BON PAIN SEATING 983 SF 5 SF/OCC. 66 OCC SEATING 43 SF 5 SF/OCC. 0 OCC. 05A STARBUCKS WORKROOM 230 SF 200 SF/OCC. 2 OCC. 05 STARBUCKS KITCHEN 288 SF 200 SF/OCC. 2 OCC. 05 STARBUCKS PRODUCTS 242 SF 30 SF/OCC. 9 OCC. & X # A/C AIR CONDITION(ER) (ING) AB ACOUST ANCHOR BOLT ACOUSTICAL ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ADJ ADJUSTABLE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AHJ AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION ALT ALTERNATE ALUM ALUMINUM ARCH ARCHITECTURAL BLDG BLKG BM BRG BTM CJ C/L CBB CFCI CLG CLO CMU COL CONC CONF CONST CONT CORR CPT CT DBL DF DIA DIM DN DS DR DET DWG EA E.J. EL ELEC ELEV EQ EQUIP ETC EWC EXIST EXT FD FE FEC FIN 4 A03. A08. 3 A000 AND ANGLE AT BY NUMBER 2 BUILDING BLOCKING BEAM BEARING BOTTOM CONSTRUCTION JOINT CENTER LINE CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED CEILING CLOSET CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COLUMN CONCRETE CONFERENCE CONSTRUCTION CONTINUOUS CORRIDOR CARPET TILE CERAMIC TILE DOUBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIAMETER DIMENSION DOWN DOWN SPOUT DOOR DETAIL DRAWING EACH EXPANSION JOINT ELEVATION ELECTRICAL ELEVATION EQUAL EQUIPMENT ET CETERA ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXISTING EXTERIOR FLOOR DRAIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FINISH EXTERIOR ELEVATION CALLOUT INTERIOR ELEVATION CALLOUT SECTION CALLOUT A000 ENLARGED PLAN CALLOUT ALIGN ABBREVIATIONS FL FM FND FR FRT FT FTG GA GALV GB GC GL GWB HDWD HM HORIZ HR HVAC ID INSUL INT INTMD INV JAN JB JT LAM LAV LLH LLV M MAINT MATL MAX MECH MTL MFR MIN MO MTD NIC NO. NOM NTS OC OD OFCI OFOI OPP PL PLAM FLOOR FACTORY MUTUAL FOUNDATION FIRE RATED FIRE RETARDANT TREATED FOOT FOOTING GAUGE GALVANIZED GRAB BAR GENERAL CONTRACTOR GLASS, GLAZING GYPSUM WALL BOARD HARDWOOD HOLLOW METAL HORIZONTAL(LY) HOUR HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING INSIDE DIAMETER INSULATION INTERIOR INTERMEDIATE INVERT JANITOR JUNCTION BOX JOINT LAMINATED LAVATORY LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LONG LEG VERTICAL MIRROR MAINTENANCE MATERIAL MAXIMUM MECHANICAL METAL MANUFACTURER MINIMUM MASONRY OPENING MOUNTED NOT IN CONTRACT NUMBER NOMINAL NOT TO SCALE ON CENTER OUTSIDE DIAMETER OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OWNER FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED OPPOSITE PLATE PLASTIC LAMINATE ROOM NAME 0 50 SF XX#-X/X-# STC - hr ' - 0" ACTX 0 t 9000 LIFE SAFETY PLAN LEGEND 00' - 0" 2 HOUR RATED FIRE PARTITION HOUR RATED FIRE PARTITION EXIT # ## EXIT INFORMATION 00 BUSINESS 000 SF 00 SF/OCC. 0 OCC. ACTUAL # OF OCCUPANTS MAX # OF OCCUPANTS CORRESPONDING ROOM NUMBER(S) USE GROUP AREA AREA PER OCCUPANT OCCUPANT LOAD FEC- EGRESS PATH W/ LONGEST TRAVEL DISTANCE AREA TAG EXISTING RECESSED MOUTNED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET # PLS PNL PTD PR PROJ PT PLYWD QT RAD RD REBAR RECT REINF REQ REP RM SF SIM SOFP SOG SPEC SQ SS STC STD STL STOR STRUCT T/BM THR T/JST TOM TOS T/ST TTD TYP UNO V VCT VERT VEST W/ WC WD W/O WR WPT WWF ROOM TAG W/ SQ. FT.; SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE WALL TAG W/ SOUND & FIRE RATING CEILING TAG DOOR TAG; SEE DOOR SCHEDULE WINDOW TAG KEYNOTE CODED NOTE PLASTER PANEL PAINTED (PAINTED FINISH) PAIR PROJECT PRESSURE TREATED PLYWOOD QUARRY TILE RADIUS ROOF DRAIN REINFORCING BAR RECTANGULAR REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED REPRESENTATIVE ROOM SQUARE FOOT SIMILAR SPRAY-ON FIREPROOFING SLAB ON GRADE SPECIFICATIONS SQUARE STAINLESS STEEL SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS STANDARD STEEL STORAGE STRUCTURAL TOP OF BEAM THRESHOLD TOP OF JOIST TOP OF MASONRY TOP OF SLAB TOP OF STEEL TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VINYL VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERTICAL VESTIBULE WITH WATER CLOSET WOOD WITHOUT WASTE RECEPTACLE WOOD-PRESERVATIVE TREATED WELDED WIRE FABRIC NOTES:. FOR ADDITIONAL REFERENCE THE CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY STANDARDS - C.S.I DOCUMENT TD ABBREVIATIONS. 2. THIS LEGEND DOES NOT ASSUME THAT ALL ABBREVIATIONS ARE USED. 3. SEE DRAWING -A50 FOR ADDITIONAL ABBREVIATIONS MERCANTILE (M) ASSEMBLY (A-2) BUSINESS (B) STORAGE / UTILITY (S-) KITCHEN (K). BASIS OF DESIGN IS GIVEN FOR PARTICULAR ITEMS WHICH ARE GOVERNED BY THE APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, AND/OR FEDERAL CODES AND/OR GUIDELINES. APPROVED EQUIVALENTS MUST BE SELECTED BY THE OWNER, AND MUST MEET ALL CRITERIA THAT THE BASIS OF DESIGN SATISFIES. THE ARCHITECT IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR CODE/GUIDELINE COMPLIANCE OF ANY ITEM WHICH WAS NOT IDENTIFIED AS THE BASIS OF DESIGN. 2. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO ADHERE TO ALL ACCEPTED INDUSTRY PRACTICES. 3. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO FOLLOW ALL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 4. ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS TO BE VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. IN THE EVENT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES, THE CONTRACTOR IS TO REPORT SAID ANOMALIES TO THE OWNER. 5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. DIMENSIONAL DISCREPANCIES AND QUESTIONS SHALL BE DIRECTED TO THE ARCHITECT. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE ALL EXISTING UTILITIES AND SERVICES PRIOR TO START OF WORK. 7. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO VERIFY AND COORDINATE EXTENT OF SLAB CUT AND TRENCHING FOR NEW SUB-GRADE UTILITIES OR SUB- GRADE UTILITIES BEING MODIFIED. SAWCUT AND/OR CORE AND REMOVE CONCRETE SLAB AS REQUIRED. COMPACT SUB-GRADE AND FILL FLUSH TO EXISTING SURFACE. PROVIDE SMOOTH, LEVEL, STEEL TROWELED SURFACE READY TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH. 8. WHERE NEW CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE SUSPENDED FROM THE EXISTING STRUCTURE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT THE EXISTING STRUCTURE HAS THE CAPACITY TO SUPPORT SUCH NEW ASSEMBLIES. 9. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE ALL FURRING AND BLOCKING AS NEEDED. 0. ALL WOOD COMPONENTS THAT ARE PART OF EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION ARE TO BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED.. ALL WOOD COMPONENTS IN EXTERIOR ASSEMBLIES TO BE PRESSURE-TREATED. 2. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FROM FACE OF FINISH TO FACE OF FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY IN THE FIELD ALL DIMENSIONS. DIMENSIONS NOTED "CLEAR" ARE NOT TO BE ADJUSTED WITHOUT APPROVAL OF ARCHITECT. 3. ITEMS MARKED AS OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED (OFOI) ARE NOT IN CONTRACT; CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AS NECESSARY. 4. ALL CONDITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. SEE GENERAL NOTES SHEET OF EACH DISCIPLINE FOR ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS. PROJECT TEAM CLIENT SMG ST CLAIR AVENUE, NE MEZZANINE LEVEL CLEVELAND, OH 444 BUILDING OWNER CUYAHOGA COUNTY CONVENTION FACILITES DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION ST. CLAIR AVENUE, NE 3RD FLOOR CLEVELAND, OH 444 TENANT LEVY RESTAURANTS 980 N. MICHIGAN AVENUE CHICAGO, IL 606 EARTH (COMPACT FILL) STONE/GRAVEL FILL GRADE CONCRETE SUITE 03 SUITE 05 ARCHITECT RICHARD L. BOWEN & ASSOCIATES INC SHAKER BOULEVARD CLEVELAND, OHIO (PH) (FX) Contact Person: KEN CHOW STRUCTURAL ENGINEER RICHARD L. BOWEN & ASSOCIATES INC SHAKER BOULEVARD CLEVELAND, OHIO (PH) (FX) Contact Person: DON THEISEN MEP ENGINEER KARPINSKI ENGINEERING 335 EUCLID AVENUE CLEVELAND, OHIO (PH) (FX) Contact Person: MATT NUTTER MATERIALS LEGEND KEY PLAN AREA OF WORK DN SOLID WOOD FINISH WOOD STEEL WOOD BLOCKING DEVELOPMENT MANAGERS: STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY 240 UTAH AVENUE SOUTH SEATTLE, WA (PH) Contact Person: TARA BYRNE tara.byrne@starbucks.com UP AU BON PAIN ONE AU BON PAIN WAY BOSTON, MA (PH) Contact Person: KAREN MURPHY karen_murphy@aubonpain.com NOT TO SCALE GYPSUM WALL BOARD RIGID INSULATION BATT INSULATION CONTINUOUS WOOD FRAMING PLAN NORTH DRAWING NUMBER TITLE -T0 TITLE, PROJECT NOTES, LIFE SAFETY ANALYSIS DRAWING TITLE ARCHITECTURAL -AD DEMO NOTES -AD2 FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT DEMO PLAN -A0 FLOOR PLAN, EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE AND PARTITION TYPES -A02 FLOOR FINISH PLAN, STAIR AND RAMP DETAILS -A03 PARTITION TYPES, DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAIL -A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -A2 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A22 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A3 INTERIOR DETAILS -A32 INTERIOR DETAILS -A33 VESTIBULE ENLARGED PLAN AND DETAILS -A4 CABINET DETAILS -A42 CABINET DETAILS -A43 CABINET DETAILS -A44 CABINET DETAILS -A50 GENERAL INFORMATION - STARBUCKS -A5 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A6 INTERIOR FLOOR PLAN & DOOR SCHEDULE -A62 PENETRATION PLAN -A63 FF AND E PLAN -A64 FF AND E PLAN SCHEDULES -A65 CASEWORK PLAN -A66 CASEWORK PLAN SCHEDULES -A67 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -A68 LIGHTING DIMENSION PLAN -A7 FLOOR FINISH PLAN -A72 WALL FINISH PLAN -A8 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A82 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A83 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A84 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A85 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A86 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS -A9 DESIGN DETAILS -A92 DESIGN DETAILS -A93 DESIGN DETAILS -A94 DESIGN DETAILS -A95 DESIGN DETAILS -A96 DESIGN DETAILS STRUCTURAL -S0 GENERAL NOTES AND DETAILS -S PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN, SECTIONS AND DETAILS -S2 FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN MECHANICAL -HD HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN -H0 HVAC LEGENDS, SCHEDULES, & GENERAL NOTES -H HVAC PLAN -H6 HVAC DETAILS -H62 HVAC HOOD DETAILS -M9 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS -M92 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING -P0 PLUMBING LEGENDS, SCHEDULES, & GENERAL NOTES -P PLUMBING PLANS -P6 PLUMBING DETAILS FIRE PROTECTION -F0 FIRE PROTECTION LEGEND, & GENERAL NOTES -F FIRE PROTECTION PLANS ELECTRICAL -ED ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN -ED2 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ONE LINE -E0 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES -E AU BON PAIN LIGHTING PLAN -E2 STARBUCKS LIGHTING PLAN -E2 AU BON PAIN POWER AND FIRE ALARM PLAN AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE -E22 STARBUCKS POWER AND FIRE ALARM PLAN AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE -E6 LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAMS -E62 ELECTRICAL DETAILS -E7 ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULE -E9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS -E92 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS -E93 TECHNOLOGY SPECIFICATIONS SITE LOCATION MAP NOT TO SCALE N ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS NOTICE DRAWING NO. -T0 C I ON ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. O GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION E O STAT H I 0 ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: CT E T G R E I H I S C A R E T D R E FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT TITLE, PROJECT NOTES, LIFE SAFETY ANALYSIS Author Checker 8832

293 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT NOTES REGARDING MOLD AND MILDEW. IN THE EVENT THE CONTRACTOR DISCOVERS, AT ANY TIME DURING DEMOLITION, CONSTRUCTION, AND/OR REMODELING OPERATIONS, EXISTING CONDITIONS THAT COULD INCLUDE THE PRESENCE OF MOLD AND/OR MILDEW, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF RECORD, IN WRITING, OF THE CONCERNS AND/OR SUSPICIONS. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL REASONABLE EFFORTS TO AVOID CONDITIONS FAVORABLE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF MOLD AND MILDEW, ESPECIALLY IN VOIDS WHICH WILL BE CONCEALED AND NOT VENTILATED. IN ALL CASES, INTERIOR SPACES AND INTERIOR FINISHED CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN DRY AND WELL-VENTILATED CONDITIONS. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH FEDERAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND OSHA REGULATIONS AND ALL LOCAL AND STATE HEALTH DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS REGARDING MOLD AND MILDEW. 4. ALL PENETRATIONS SHALL BE SEALED WATER-TIGHT TO PREVENT MOISTURE MIGRATION FROM ENTERING THE BUILDING OR WALL CAVITIES. 5. ALL CONDENSATE DRAIN PANS SHALL BE CLEANED AND KEPT FREE FROM DEBRIS UNTIL AND WHEN THE FACILITY IS TURNED OVER TO THE OWNER OR TENANT. INSURE POSITIVE DRAINAGE AT ALL DRAIN PANS. INSURE THAT ALL "COLD" SURFACES ARE INSULATED AND COVERED WITH A FULLY SEALED AND CONTINUOUS VAPOR BARRIER. ("COLD" SURFACES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING, CHILLED WATER PIPING, INTERIOR RAIN LEADERS, OUTDOOR AIR INTAKES, AND DUCTWORK CARRYING AIR CONDITIONED SUPPLY AIR.) 6. INSURE THAT THERE ARE NO WATER LEAKS IN CONCEALED PLUMBING CHASES. RETURN AIR PATHS AND PLENUMS SHALL BE KEPT DRY. ALL EXISTING SUPPLY AIR PATHS AND ALL EXISTING DUCTWORK TO BE RE-USED SHALL BE CLEANED AND TREATED AS REQUIRED TO REMOVE THE POTENTIAL FOR MOLD AND MILDEW. ALL DAMP AREAS SHALL BE DRIED THOROUGHLY PRIOR TO ENCLOSURE. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES GENERAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS; EACH CONTRACTOR IS TO VISIT THE SITE AND BECOME COMPLETELY FAMILIAR WITH THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ELEMENTS FOR DEMOLITION DURING BIDDING PERIOD. DRAWINGS ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY, AND DOES NOT INDICATE ALL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS. REFER TO ALL DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS TO DETERMINE THE FULL SCOPE AND SPECIFIC REMOVAL REQUIREMENTS. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND BE FAMILIAR WITH THE RULES AND REGULATIONS OF THE FEDERAL, STATE, COUNTY AND CITY. REPORT ALL DISCREPANCIES TO THE ARCHITECT. TEMPORARY SHUTDOWNS OF BUILDING SYSTEMS MUST BE COORDINATED AND APPROVED BY THE OWNER. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SALVAGE MATERIALS OR PORTIONS THEREOF FROM DEMOLISHED MATERIAL BEFORE IT IS PROPERLY DISPOSED. COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S REP, LIST TO BE PROVIDED. COORDINATE MATERIAL STORAGE LOCATION WITH OWNER EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH AND REPAIR EXISTING WALLS AND FLOORS ASSOCIATED WITH THEIR WORK INCLUDING REMOVED EQUIPMENT, ANCHORS AND FASTENERS TO MATCH EXISTING. WHERE ITEMS ARE SHOWN TO BE REMOVED WITHIN A FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED FIRE RATINGS BY PROVIDING NECESSARY FIRESTOPPING, OR FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. PATCHED AREAS SHALL COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES. COORDINATE ALL DEMOLITION WORK WITH OWNER'S SCHEDULE OF OPERATIONS. OWNER MAY REQUEST DEMO OPERATIONS TO BE SCHEDULED AROUND SPECIAL EVENTS. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION ITEMS AND REQUIREMENTS. ALL CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS TO REMAIN ARE TO BE PROTECTED FROM DAMAGE. ANY DAMAGE TO BE REPAIRED AT CONTRACTOR EXPENSE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE DEBRIS AND SALVAGED ITEMS WITH A MINIMUM OF INTERFERENCE WITH STREETS, WALKS AND ACCESS ROUTES WHICH SHALL NOT BE CLOSED WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE OWNER. THE OWNER SHALL SPECIFY IF ANY MATERIALS OR PIECES OF EQUIPMENT ARE TO BE SALVAGED FOR REUSE OR RECYCLING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN EXISTING UTILITIES INDICATED TO REMAIN IN SERVICE AND PROTECT THEM AGAINST DAMAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION. FIRE PROTECTION FACILITIES SHALL REMAIN IN SERVICE DURING CONSTRUCTION. FOR ANY UTILITIES THAT WILL NEED TO BE TEMPORARILY INTERRUPTED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A SCHEDULE TO THE OWNER FOR COORDINATION. IF UTILITY SERVICES/SYSTEMS ARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED, RELOCATED, OR ABANDONED; BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE DEMOLITION, PROVIDE TEMPORARY SERVICES/SYSTEMS THAT BYPASS THE AREA OF DEMOLITION AND MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF SERVICE TO OTHER PARTS OF THE FACILITY CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE DUMPSTERS SERVING ALL AREAS OF DEMOLITION AND FOR THE DISCARDING OF ALL DEMOLISHED MATERIALS. COORDINATE LOCATION OF DUMPSTER AND DUMPSTER ACCESS WITH ONWER. PROVIDE ALL SAFETY BARRICADES TO PROTECT PUBLIC AT LARGE. COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE REGULATIONS. DEMOLITION OF STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION OR ELECTRICAL ITEMS ENCOUNTERED IN AREAS INTENDED TO BE DEMOLISHED ARE DESCRIBED IN RESPECTIVE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. EACH CONTRACTORS SHALL COORDINATE THEIR WORK WITH THE WORK OF OTHER ASSOCIATED CONTRACTORS AS NEEDED. ALL EXIT CORRIDORS MUST BE MAINTAINED CLEAR AND PROTECTED AT ALL TIMES REMOVE EXISTING ELEMENTS AS INDICATED BY DASHED LINES AND/OR AS NOTED. SURFACES OF EXISTING AREAS WHICH HAVE BEEN ALTERED BY DEMOLITION NOT SPECIFICALLY CALLED FOR SHALL BE REPAIRED AND FINISHED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT SURFACES. PROTECT ALL REMAINING SURFACES, FLOORS, WALLS, AND CEILINGS FROM AREAS OF DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR(S) PERFORMING DEMOLITION WORK SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR & PREPARE ALL ADJACENT SUBSTRATES FOR APPLICATION OF NEW FINISHES REQUIRED AND AS SPECIFIED WHERE BUILDING COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN REMOVED. WHERE NEW FINISHES ARE NOT REQUIRED OR SPECIFIED THE CONTRACTOR PERFORMING THE DEMOLITION SHALL REPAIR EXISTING SUBSTRATES TO MATCH ADJACENT SUBSTRATES. ALL BUILDING SERVICES REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN BUILDING OPERATION OF OTHER FLOORS (ABOVE OR BELOW) OR IN ADJOINING SPACES SHALL BE MAINTAINED. BUILDING SERVICES IN FINISHED SPACES SHALL BE CONCEALED, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. BUILDING SERVICES ENCOUNTERED IN DEMOLISHED PARTITIONS AND CEILINGS WHICH ARE TO REMAIN SHALL BE REROUTED AND CONCEALED. THOSE BUILDING SERVICES THAT ARE INDICATED TO BE ABANDONED SHALL BE CAPPED AND CONCEALED IN THE FLOOR, WALL OR CEILING. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO VERIFY ALL SERVICES PRIOR TO REMOVAL AND DISCONNECTION INCLUDING ELECTRICAL, HVAC, PLUMBING, SECURITY, AND TELEPHONE/DATA FOR ADJOINING OCCUPIED SPACES. PROTECT EXISTING SURFACES TO REMAIN DURING DEMOLITION. DAMAGE TO SURFACES NOT BEING DEMOLISHED SHALL BE REPAIRED AT THE DEMOLISHING CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO PROMPTLY REPAIR ALL DAMAGE CAUSED TO ADJACENT AREAS BY DEMOLITION AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR IS TO PATCH AS REQUIRED TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT AREA IN MATERIAL, FINISH AND COLOR TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND OWNER. IN ALL AREAS WHERE DEMOLITION CAUSES UNEVENNESS AND/OR VOIDS IN THE FLOORS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING AND FLOOR LEVELING TO LEVEL FLOOR WITH ADJACENT SURFACES. FLOOR LEVELING MATERIAL SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH NEW FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH ALL EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS AND FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES PRIOR TO BEGINNING ANY OF THE WORK. PRIOR TO ANY WORK BEING DONE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE A COMPREHENSIVE VIDEO OF THE SITE AND EXISTING STRUCTURES. A COPY OF THIS VIDEO SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROCEED WITH EXTREME CARE IN PERFORMING WORK IN OR NEAR EXISTING FACILITIES IN ORDER TO ASSURE THE SAFETY AND /OR INTEGRITY OF THE STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, OPERATIONS, PERSONNEL AND THE PUBLIC. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFORM WITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND CITY GOVERNMENT SAFETY REGULATIONS AND OTHER APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY. PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK AT THE SITE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT TO THE OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE A "DUST CONTAINMENT AND NOISE CONTROL PLAN" INDICATING DUST CURTAINS, AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT, AND CONTROLLED ACCESS TO BE USED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO PROTECT THE EXISTING FACILITIES, PERSONNEL AND THE PUBLIC. THIS PLAN SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL OSHA AND LOCAL REQUIREMENTS AND BE APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL OR INSPECTOR. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT ALL EXISTING FACILITIES DURING THE DEMOLITION. ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE REPAIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY SHORE BRACE AND OTHERWISE PROTECT THE EXISTING STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED DURING THE DEMOLITION PROCESS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS SHORING AND BRACING. DEMOLITION USING EXPLOSIVE OR INCENDIARY METHODS IS PROHIBITED. DO NOT WELD TO EXISTING STEEL THAT IS TO REMAIN WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. WHERE FLAME CUTTING AND/OR ARC-WELDING OPERATIONS ARE TAKING PLACE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN PORTABLE FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL POSSIBLE PRECAUTIONS NOT TO DISTURB ANY EXISTING PIPE, DUCT OR SURFACE INSULATION THAT IS TO REMAIN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING INORGANIC LEAD, SOLVENTS, CHEMICALS AND CLEANING AGENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PERSONNEL PROTECTION FOR ALL HIS WORKERS ON THE CONSTRUCTION SITE AS REQUIRED BY ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS EXCEPT FOR ITEMS INDICATED TO BE RECYCLED, REUSED, OR SALVAGED, REMOVE DEMOLISHED MATERIALS FROM THE SITE AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF THEM IN AN EPA-APPROVED LANDFILL. CLEAN ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND IMPROVEMENTS OF DUST, DIRT, AND DEBRIS CAUSED BY THE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS. RETURN ADJACENT AREAS TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION BEFORE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS BEGAN. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS WITH THE BUILDING ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE ENGINEERING SERVICES REQUIRED TO DETERMINE IF CERTAIN EQUIPMENT CAN SAFELY PASS OVER EXISTING UTILITY LINES WITHOUT DAMAGING THOSE UTILITIES. ANY DAMAGES TO EXISTING UTILITIES SHALL BE REPAIRED AT CONTRACTORS EXPENSE. G.C. SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY PROTECTION AS REQUIRED FOR AREAS REMAINING IN OPERATION DURING WORK. PROVISIONS MUST BE MADE FOR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC TO MAINTAIN A SAFE JOB SITE. PROVIDE SECURE TEMPORARY WEATHER TIGHT BARRIER AT ALL OPENINGS AS A RESULT OF DEMOLITION WORK INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO REMOVAL OF WALLS, STOREFRONT, DOORS, WINDOWS, LOUVERS, ROOFING, ETC. ALL DIMENSIONS PROVIDED IN DRAWINGS ARE +/- AND ARE TO BE FIELD VERIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR. PATCH AND REPAIR SOFP AND INTUMESCENT COATING AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN FIRE RATING. STRUCTURAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS; THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND THE FINAL CLEARANCE OF ANY TEMPORARY NEEDLING, UNDERPINNING, SHORING, OR BRACING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES. CONSTRUCTION LOADS SHALL NOT EXCEED DESIGN LIVE LOADS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL DESIGN REQUIRED TO SUPPORT CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT USED IN CONSTRUCTING THIS PROJECT. SHORING AND RESHORING IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. ALL DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS, AND CONDITIONS RELATED TO EXISTING CONSTRCUTION SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO START OF SHOP DRAWINGS. ALL CONDITIONS THAT ARE NOT AS ASSUMED ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE CALLED TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF RECORD. ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE I ON THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 0/4/207 2:29:4 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt IN ALL AREAS WHERE DEMOLITION CAUSES UNEVENNESS AND/OR VOIDS IN PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD WALLS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING AND LEVELING THE WALL WITH ADJACENT SURFACES. APPLY A SKIM COATING TO WALL SURFACES WITH EXTENSIVE VOIDS AND/OR UNEVENNESS. ALL PROJECTING OR SURFACE MOUNTED ITEMS ASSOCIATED WITH DEMOLITION SHALL BE EITHER REMOVED, CAPPED AND/OR CONCEALED BEHIND FINISHED SURFACES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WELD REMOVAL SHALL BE DONE WITH A FINE CARBON ARC EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR JET STREAM (AIR CARBON ARC CUTTING - CAC-A). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL WET SURFACES BEING DEMOLISHED AS WELL AS THE ADJACENT SITE AREA TO LIMIT RAISING DIRT AND DUST TO THE LOWEST LEVELS PRACTICAL. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WATER TRUCK, WATER LINE AND HOSES AS REQUIRED FOR THIS PURPOSE. IF THE EXISTING STRUCTURE SHOWS CORROSION OR DETERIORATION TO THE EXTENT THAT THE CONTRACTOR IS CONCERNED ABOUT POSSIBLE STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT OR THE SAFETY OF HIS WORKERS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CEASE WORK IN THAT AREA AND NOTIFY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY. GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT DEMO NOTES Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -AD

294 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT E GENERAL NOTES - DEMOLITION PLANS. DEMOLISH CEILING SYSTEM IN ITS ENTIRETY IN AREA OF WORK INCLUDING SUPPORTS, UNO. 2. SEE MEP DEMOLITION DRAWINGS FOR ADDTIONAL NOTES. 3. ON VISIBLE SURFACES OF GYPSUM BOARD OF TEMPORARY COSNTRUCTION PARTITION, PROVIDE ONE COAT PROMAR 200 ZERO VOC INTERIOR LATEX PRIMER, BW8W02600 BY SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQUIVALENT BY BENJAMIN MOORE & CO..0 MILS DRF AND TWO COATS PROMAR CEILING PAINT INTERIOR FLAT A27W05050 SERIES BY SHERWIN WILLAMS OR EQUIVALENT BY BENJAMIN MOORE & MILS DFT PER COAT, COLOR TO MATCH BENJAMIN MOORE GLACIER WHITE OC D EXISTING GLAZING PANEL TO BE REMOVED 5'-6" +/- V.I.F. EXISTING VERTICAL MULLION TO BE REMOVED ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 3' - 0" +/- NOTES:. PROVIDE TEMPORARY CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM SUPPORT AS NEEDED. 2. PROVIDE WEATHER-TIGHT AND SECURED CONSTRUCTION BARRIER AS NEEDED. 3' - 5" 5 -AD2 4 -AD2 EXISTING CONCRETE CURB TO BE REMOVED DEMO () LAYER OF EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD TO ACCOMMODATE NEW TILE BACKER BOARD; COORDINATE LOCATION WITH INTERIOR ELEVATION EXISTING CASEWORK TO BE REMOVED 2' - 5" NEW TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION PARTITION; COORDINATE LOCATION WITH PLUMBING. RICHARD.WEN9BO306 EXTERIOR DEMO ELEVATION -AD2 SCALE: /4" = '-0" SAW CUT EXISTING SLAB FOR FUTURE UTILITIES, SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT AND LOCATION 2ND FLOOR 30' - 0" EXISTING SOFFIT ABOVE TO BE REMOVED DEMO EXISTING INTERIOR CURTAIN WALL AND ENTRANCE SYSTEMS IN THEIR ENTIRETY INCLUDING SUPPORT STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING CHIP OUT EXISTING SLAB THIS AREA " DOWN FROM FINISH FLOOR LEVEL 6'-0" W x 7'-0" T HM DOORS AND FRAME, TYPICAL; COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER; PAINT PER GENERAL NOTE 3; PROVIDE GASKET SEALS AND SWEEPS ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T STRUCTURE ABOVE BRACE AS NEEDED -AD2 6 (2) LAYERS POLYETHYLENE SHEETS EACH SIDE OF STUDS E 0' - 3 /2" 7' - 5" 4 -AD2 REMOVE WINDOW TREATMENT SYSTEM CAREFULLY AND TURN OVER TO OWNER DEMO EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE FOR NEW ENTRY; COORDINATE DIMENSIONS WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION; SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR DEMO OF SUBGRADE UTILITIES 3' - 9 /2" 7' - 3 /2" CHIP OUT EXISTING SLAB THIS AREA " DOWN FROM FINISH FLOOR LEVEL EXISTING DISPLAY CASES AND PARTITION BUMP OUTS TO BE REMOVED, TYP; PROVIDE GYP BOARD TO MATCH EXISTING DEMISING WALL CONSTRUCTION AS NEEDED DEMO GYP. BOARD THIS SIDE, SEE SHEET NOTE 6 ON DRAWING -A6. SAW CUT EXISTING SLAB FOR UTILITIES, SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION EXISTING WOOD PANEL CEILING ABOVE TO REMAIN. CAFEFULLY REMOVE EXISTING WOOD PANEL CEILING ABOVE; SALVAGE AND STORE FOR REUSE RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 2 EXISTING EXTERIOR SIDE WALK -AD2 I 0 H E T I H C T LEXISTING SILL MULLION AND GLAZING TO BE REMOVED O F O C A R D E R E E T ST FLOOR 0' - 0" F STAT G R E S I 0/4/207 2:29:26 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt 5 SILL DEMOLITION DETAIL -AD2 SCALE: " = '-0" 5/8" 4 DEMOLITION DETAIL -AD2 SCALE: " = '-0" EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB TO BE REMOVED EXISTING CONCRETE CURB TO BE REMOVED EXISTING CURTAIN SYSTEM TO REMAIN EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB TO BE REMOVED ST FLOOR 0' - 0" T.O. LANDING - 0' - 8 3/4" EXISTING WOOD PANEL CEILING SYSTEM TO REMAIN CAREFULLY REMOVE CEILING SYSTEM MODULES AS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION BARRIER INSTALLATION. SALVAGE AND SAVE FOR REUSE. 2 CONSTRUCTION PARTITION SECTION -AD2 SCALE: 3" = '-0" 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PAINT PER GENERAL NOTE 3 6" MIN 20GA METAL 6" O.C. MAX BATT INSULATION FULL THICKNESS OF STUDS CONTINUOUS WOOD BLOCKING ADHERED TO EXISTING FLOOR WITH SILICONE TO RESIST 50#/LF LATERAL FORCE. CONTRACTOR TO RECOMMEND PRODUCT THAT CAN BE EASILY REMOVED AND CLEANED. ST FLOOR 0' - 0" DO NOT ATTACH MECHANICAL FASENERS OR ANCHORS TO EXISTING FLOOR FINISH. PROTECT FINISH FROM DAMAGE AS NEEDED. G FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN -AD2 SCALE: /4" = '-0" EXISTING WALL ABOVE TO BE REMOVED PLAN NORTH EXISTING PARTITION BUMP OUTS TO BE REMOVED, TYP; PROVIDE GYP BOARD TO MATCH EXISTING DEMISING WALL CONSTRUCTION AS NEEDED EXISTING TRELLIS TO BE REMOVED LEGEND 6'-0" W x 7'-0" T HM DOORS AND FRAME, TYPICAL; COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER; PAINT PER GENERAL NOTE 3; PROVIDE GASKET SEALS AND SWEEPS EXISTING COMPONENT TO REMAIN EXISTING COMPONENT TO BE DEMOLISHED NEW TEMPORARY COMPONENT AREA FOR SAW CUT OF EXISTING SLAB AREA OF EXISTING SLAB TO BE CHIPPED DOWN GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT DEMO PLAN Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -AD2

295 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE # DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL # CFCI OFCI OFOI REMARKS D RICHARD.WEN9BO306. WALL-MOUNTED HAND SINK EAGLE GROUP HSA-0-FA X 6.. WORK TABLE ADVANCE 30" x 42" X 6.2. COFFEE BREWER CURTIS GEMSIF0A000 X 6.3 ICED TEA BREWER BUNN TB6Q X 0.3 GLASS DOOR BAKERY DISPLAY MOSELEY CUSTOM 36" X. WALL-MOUNTED HAND SINK EAGLE GROUP HSA-0-FA X.2 HAND SINK SOAP DISPENSER ECOLAB - X.3 HAND SINK PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER CASCADES 0205 X.4 SANDWICH UNIT (27") DOOR TRUE TSSU-27-2M-B X.5 S.S. SHELF (2 TIER) - X.7 MERRY CHEF OVEN MERRY CHEF EIKON E-4 X.8 SANDWICH WRAP WORK TABLE ADVANCE 30" x 60" X.0 BAGEL SLICER PRINCE CASTLE 970A X.2 EGG COOKER A.J. ANTUNES ES-604 X.3 SANDWICH UNIT (32") 2 DRAWERS TRUE TFP-32-2M-2D X.5 SANDWICH UNIT ENCLOSURE CUSTOM MILLWORK - X SEE DETAIL 7/-A44.6 SNEEZE GUARD - BREAD SHELF CUSTOM MILLWORK - X SEE DETAIL 7/-A44.7 MENUBOARDS - - X.9 SANDWICH UNIT (72") DELFIELD UC4472N-30M-ABP X.20 TYPE 2 CONDENSATE HOOD - - X SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 2. CYO REFRIGERATED CASE 60" FEDERAL - X 2.3 8" WRAP COUNTER CUSTOM MILLWORK X SEE DETAIL 3/-A REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR ( DOOR) TRUE GDM-23 X 3.4 ESPRESSO MACHINE SCHAERER COFEE ART PLUS X 3.5 ESPRESSO COUNTER CUSTOM MILLWORK 36" x 96" X SEE DETAIL 2/-A UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR (27") TRUE UCR27 X 3.3 ICE MACHINE (UNDERCOUNTER) SCOTTSMAN CU526MA X 4. SMOOTHIE WORK TABLE EAGLE 30" x 48" X 4.3 DIPPERWELL FISHER 304 X 4.6 ISLAND OASIS BLENDER ISLAND OASIS SB200 X 5. BEVERAGE COUNTER CUSTOM MILLWORK 32" x 96" X SEE DETAIL /-A4 5.3 SODA DISPENSER CORNELIUS - BY VENDOR 8 HEAD X 5.6 ICED TEA DISPENSER BUNN TDO-N X 5.7 CRATHCO BEVERAGE DISPENSER CRATHCO D25 X 6..2 REFRIGERATED DISPLAY CASE (45.5") OASIS (STRUCTURAL) B-42 X 6.2 HOT HOLD DISPLAY CABINET FEDERAL CH2428SS X 6.3 HEATED CABINET COUNTER CUSTOM MILLWORK - X SEE DETAIL 5/-A42 7. SOUP COUNTER CUSTOM MILLWORK 36" x 78" X SEE DETAIL /-A CUP BASKET - - X 7.5 SOUP WARMER VOLLRATH X 8. COFFEE WARMER CURTIS GEM3IF X SEE DETAIL 6/-A COFFEE COUNTER CUSTOM MILLWORK 36" x 78" X 9. POS MILLWORK CUSTOM MILLWORK 30" x 30" X SEE DETAIL 5/-A4 9.3 REGISTER SYSTEM/ CASH DRAWER BY FRANCHISE - X 9.4 RECEIPT PRINTER BY FRANCHISE - X 9.5 NUTRITIONAL KIOSK IPAD OR SIMILAR, WALL MTD - X 20. CONDIMENT - TRASH COUNTER CUSTOM MILLWORK 24" x 30" X SEE DETAIL /-A42 99 UNDERCOUNTER DOMESTIC-STYLE DISHWASHER - - X SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES:. ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR ALL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING INCLUDING OFOI ITEMS. 3. EQUIPMENT IN THIS SCHEDULE IS ONLY FOR AU BON PAIN (05). SEE DRAWING -A63 AND -A64 FOR EQUIPMENT FOR STARBUCKS (03, 03A). 4. SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENT. GENERAL NOTES - FLOOR PLANS. PROVIDE ABUSE-RESISTANT GYPSUM WALL BOARD BELOW 6'-0" AFF U.N.O. 2. PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH ON GYPSUM WALL BOARDS TO RECEIVE TILES OR WALL COVERING, U.N.O. 3. PROVIDE LEVEL 5 FINISH ON GYPSUM WALL BOARDS TO RECEIVE PAINT FINISH U.N.O. 4. SEE DRAWING -A03 FOR PARTITION TYPES AND DOOR SCHEDULE. E F 25' - 0" 5' - 0" 9' - 0" FROST SLAB, MATCH SURFACE ELEVATION WITH ADJACENT EXISTING SIDEWALK; SEE STRUCTURAL DWG CENTER PARTITION ON EXTERIOR MULLION 9' - 9" -A A A (3) ' - 0" 2.5 -A22 TRASH ABOVE TRASH BELOW 99 CUPS 5 VESTIBULE ' - 8 /2".2.3 ABOVE ABOVE (8) 7.5 (8) DN.3 8'.5-5" DN BELOW A BELOW /4" A ' - 0 /4" -A AU BON PLUGMOLD BELOW -A33 PAIN 03 04B 04C A03 SEE DRAWING -A6 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA 2 WORKROOM 05A -A03 SHELF ABOVE 9 -A42 -A3 2' - 5" ' - 7" 8" 9' - 2 7/8" 8" 2 -A3 -A3 -A2 G7-F/A TYP 9' - 8" ' - 6 /4" ' - 8" 2' - 8" ' - 8" ' - 6 /4" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE I ON THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O E O F I 0 STAT E T G R E I H I C A R E T S D R E C T L0/4/207 2:4:29 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt G -A0 SEE DRAWING -A6 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA SCALE: /4" = '-0" STARBUCKS 05 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN 9' - 8" 5/8" GWB ON 3-5/8" METAL STUDS FURRING; FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT PARTITONS GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT FLOOR PLAN, EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE AND PARTITION TYPES Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A0

296 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT FINISH SCHEDULE ABBREVIATION MATERIAL PRODUCT COLOR ACT- ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE #8839 WHITE ACT-2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE #8669 WHITE CT- PORCELAIN WALL TILE #B0 ANTICO TAUPE CT-2 PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE #LJ85 LEAD CTB-2 PORCELAIN FLOOR BASE #LK0 LEAD ERT-A EPOXY RESIN TERRAZZO MATCH EXISTING MATCH EXISTING, AS INDICATED ON BASE BUILDING DRAWINGS ERT-B EPOXY RESIN TERRAZZO MATCH EXISTING MATCH EXISTING, AS INDICATED ON BASE BUILDING DRAWINGS MTL- ALUMINUM - POWDERCOATING RAL #809 MTL-2 STAINLESS STEEL - #4 FINISH PERT-2 PRECAST EPOXY RESIN TERRAZZO MATCH EXISTING MATCH EXISTING, AS INDICATED ON BASE BUILDING DRAWINGS PL- PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH #WM95 HONEY MAPLE PT- PAINT #2-40 TAOS TAUPE PT-2 PAINT #HC-3 WATERBERRY CREAM PT-3 PAINT #05 MAPLE SYRUP PT-4 PAINT #6684 BRITTLEBRUSH PT-5 PAINT #OC-37 GLACIER WHITE PT-6 PAINT #HC-05 ROCKPORT GRAY QT- QUARRY TILE #0Q42 ARID GRAY SSM-2 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL CORIAN NATURAL GREY ST- STONE WALL FACING GRANITE BLACK POLISHED, TO MATCH EXISTING ST-2 STONE COUNTERTOP MARBLE WHITE CARRARA POLISHED WC- WALL COVERING REED ASH WM- WALK-OFF ENTRY MAT ROLL-UP MAT MATCH EXISTING D 2 /2" EXIST CT-2 EQ 9' - 2 3/8" EQ RICHARD.WEN9BO30ERT-A EXIST QT- CT-2 ERT-A GENERAL NOTES - FLOOR FINISH PLAN CT-2. ALL ALUMINUM MULLIONS AND ENTRANCES TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH. VERIFY FINISH MATCHES FINISH OF ADJACENT EXTERIOR CURTAIN WALL MULLIONS. DIVIDER STRIP AS SPECIFIED TILE START POINT ' - 0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T E WM- PERT-2 PERT-2 ERT-B DN CT-2 ERT-B 2 -A32 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com WM- ERT-B DN ERT-B TBD NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. -A32 H O F O I 0 E T C T LI H C A R D R E F E STAT I E T S G R E 0/4/207 2:6:47 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt FLOORING FINISH PLAN -A02 SCALE: /4" = '-0" G SEE DRAWING -A7 FOR FINISHES IN THIS AREA 3 -A32 GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT FLOOR FINISH PLAN, STAIR AND RAMP DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A02

297 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT DOOR SCHEDULE 8832 SCHEDULED DOOR EPOXY TERRAZZO FINISH DOOR AS SCHEDULED FROST SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWING; SLOPED TO DRAIN CURTAIN WALL MULLION BEYOND ALUMINUM THREHOLD EMBED IN SEALANT COUNTERSUNK EXPANSION ANCHOR SPECIFIED ENTRANCE MAT WT ROOM DOOR FRAME DETAILS GLAZING TYPE WIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS MATERIAL FINISH TYPE MATERIAL FINISH HEAD JAMB SILL TYPE FIRE RATING HARDWARE SET # COMMENTS DOOR # ST FLOOR 03 AU BON PAIN A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 3/4" HOLLOW METAL PT-2/PT-6 HOLLOW METAL PT-2/PT-6 - ST A VESTIBULE X 3' - 2" 8' - 7 3/4" 2" ALUMINUM ANODIZED ALUMINUM ANODIZED S GL A 04B VESTIBULE X 3' - 0" 7' - 3/4" 2" ALUMINUM ANODIZED ALUMINUM ANODIZED S2 GL B 04C VESTIBULE X 3' - 0" 7' - 3/4" 2" ALUMINUM ANODIZED ALUMINUM ANODIZED S2 GL C SCHLUTER-DECO OR EQUAL T.O. FLOOR FINISH SPECIFIED FLOOR TILES 3/8" EQ EQ COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER AND SEALANT LAP MEMBRANE FLASHING OVER FOUNDATION WALL WATERPROOF SYSTEM 3" 8" 3 /2" 2" DOOR SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES. DOOR DETAILS ARE ON THIS DRAWING SHEET, U.N.O. S2 -A03 SILL DETAIL SCALE: 3" = '-0" S -A03 SILL DETAIL SCALE: 3" = '-0" 3' - 6" 2' - 9" 0" 3 /2" 2" 2. VERIFY ALUMINUM MULLION AND ENTRANCE FINISH MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING ALUMINUM FINISH. 3. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR GLAZING TYPES. 4. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR PAINT COLORS. 5. SEE DRAWING -A6 FOR ADDITIONAL DOOR AND DOOR INFORMATION. DOOR SCHEDULE COMMENTS. EXISTING DOOR, AND FRAME TO REAMIN. PROVIDE PT-2 FINISH ROOM SIDE AND PT-6 FINISH CORRIDOR SIDE. B VERIFY DIMENSIONS OF GLAZED OPENING WITH DIMENSIONS OF SALVAGED GLASS TO BE REUSED DOOR TYPES X A FRAME TYPES DOOR HARDWARE SET 00: EXTERIOR SINGLE DOOR: 4 EA. HW HINGE IVES 5BBHW 4.5X4.5 NRP EA. PANIC HARDWARE VON DUPRIN CD-35A-NL0OP-388 EA. RIM HOUSING SCHLAGE EA. FSIC CONSTR. CORE SCHLAGE ICX EA. FSCI CORE SCHLAGE EA. 90 DEG OFFSET PULL IVES 890HD 2 O EA. SURFACE MOUNT CLOSER LCN 4040XP SCUSH EA. PA MOUNTING PLATE LCN PA EA. CUSH SHOE SUPPORT LCN EA. BLADE STOP SPACER LCN SET DOOR SEAL MATCH EXISTING ALUMINUM ENTRANCE ON SITE EA. DOOR SWEEP ZERO INTERNATIONAL 898AA EA. DOOR CONTACT SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SET 002: INTERIOR SINGLE DOOR: 4 EA. HW HINGE IVES 5BBHW 4.5X4.5 NRP EA. PANIC HARDWARE VON DUPRIN CD-35A-NL0OP-388 EA. RIM HOUSING SCHLAGE EA. FSIC CONSTR. CORE SCHLAGE ICX EA. FSCI CORE SCHLAGE EA. 90 DEG OFFSET PULL IVES 890HD 2 O EA. SURFACE MOUNT CLOSER LCN 4040XP SCUSH EA. PA MOUNTING PLATE LCN PA EA. CUSH SHOE SUPPORT LCN EA. BLADE STOP SPACER LCN SET DOOR SEAL MATCH EXISTING ALUMINUM ENTRANCE ON SITE EA. DOOR SWEEP ZERO INTERNATIONAL 898AA ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T I H C T LC A R F D E R E E T STAT S G R E I 0/4/207 2:7:0 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt PARTITION NOTES: PART'N MATERIAL NOMINAL HEIGHT PARTITION RATING G7-F/A- LEGEND PART'N MATERIAL NOMINAL DEPTH PART'N HEIGHT F-FURRING G-GYPSUM T-TEMPERED GLASS F-FULL HEIGHT TO STRUCTURE P-PARTIAL HEIGHT ABOVE CEILING K-KNEEWALL BELOW CEILING C-PARTIAL HEIGHT TO CEILING A-SOUND ATTENUATION OR BATT INSULATION -ONE HOUR FIRE RATED INDICATES RATED/NO. OF HOURS. PROVIDE ABUSE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD FROM FLOOR FINISH TO 6'-0" ABOVE FLOOR FINISH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 2. PROVIDE MOISTURE AND MOLD RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD AT BACK OF HOUSE AREA WHERE CERAMIC TILE DOES NOT OCCUR. 3. PROVIDE CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD IN LIEU OF GYPSUM BOARD WHERE CERAMIC TILE OCCURS. 4. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS IN ALL GYPSUM BOARD WALLS THAT EXCEED 30 FEET IN LENGTH. CONTROL JOINTS SHALL BE SPACED NOT MORE THAN 30 FEET ON CENTER U.N.O. WHERE POSSIBLE ALIGN CONTROL JOINT WITH DOOR FRAME. 5. ALLOW FOR REQUIRED DEFLECTION AT ALL FULL HEIGHT WALLS. 6. SEE DRAWING -A6 FOR ADDITIONAL PARTITION TYPES EXISTING GYP. BD. G7-F/A G7-F/A- SLOTTED DEFLECTION SLIP TRACK UNDERSIDE OF STRUCT. ABOVE SEAL PARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK ON EACH SIDE OF PARTITION (PER UL# HW-D-006 WHERE INDICATED) ONE () LAYER 5/8" GYP. BD. TYPE 'X' ON BOTH SIDES OF 3-5/8" OR 6" 20 GA. MTL. O.C. PAINT AS SPECIFIED 6" FIBERGLASS BATT INSULATION AS NEEDED CONTINUOUS 6" 20 GA. MTL. RUNNER FASTED SECURELY BASE - SEE FINISH LEGEND FINISH FLOOR. SEE FINISH LEGEND STRUCT. FLOOR 3RD FLOOR 46' - 0" SEAL PARTITION (PER UL# BW-S-0002 WHERE REQUIRED) RATED/NON-RATED PARTITION WITH/WITHOUT SOUND ATTENUATION 5 PARTITION TYPE -A03 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 4" 4 7/8" /2" MDF SUBSTRATE 3/8"X3-/2" MASONRY FASTENERS WITH EXPANSION SHIELDS. TYP. OF 4 DOUBLE WALL ENDS PL- LAMINATE FINISH PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL KNEE BRACE KIT WITH 2"X2" TUBE AND 3-/2"X5"X/2" BASE PLATE AS MANUFACTURED BY "SOFTFORMS" MODEL NUMBER "SKB". 4 PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL PLAN DETAIL - AT WALL BRACE -A03 SCALE: 3" = '-0" -A03 2 /8" SCALE: /2" = '-0" /2" SSM-2 CAP T.O. CAP 2'-5" A.F.F. "F" REVEAL MOLDING AS MANUFACTURED BY FRY REGLET. 5/8" X 5/8" MODEL NO.: DRMF PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 7/8" METAL FURRING HAT 6" O.C. NEW 3-5/8" METAL STUDS AT 6" O.C. 5/8" GYP. WALL BOARD WC- WALL FINISH WB- BASE FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH PLAN 3 WAINSCOT AT NEW WALL -A03 PROVIDE BED OF ADHESIVE AS REQUIRED FOR FULL BONDING BETWEEN LOW WALL FRAMING AND CAP "F" REVEAL MOLDING AS MANUFACTURED BY FRY REGLET. 5/8" X 5/8" MODEL NO.: DRMF TAPE & SEAL JOINT COMPOUND. SANDED SMOOTH FOR FLUSH CONDITION 20 GAUGE 3-5/8" CFS 6" O.C. /2" MDF SUBSTRATE EACH SIDE PL- LAMINATE FINISH WB- FLOOR STRUCTURE SCALE: /2" = '-0" 5 /2" 2" /2" SSM-2 T.O. CAP 4'-6" A.F.F. KNEE BRACE FOR WALL SUPPORT, SEE PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL DETAIL, THIS SHEET BASE TRACK ATTACHED W/ 24" O.C. MAX. OMIT TRACK AT KNEE BRACE LOCATIONS MASONRY ANCHORS W/ EXPANSION SHEILDS PER DETAIL AND BRACE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. SEE PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL BRACE SUPPORT DETAIL 2 TYPICAL PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION SECTION -A03 3" 5/8" SCALE: /2" = '-0" 2 /8" /2" EXISTING PARTITION TO REMAIN SSM-2 CAP "F" REVEAL MOLDING AS MANUFACTURED BY FRY REGLET. 5/8" X 5/8" MODEL NO.: DRMF /8" METAL FURRING HAT 6" O.C. 5/8" GYP. BOARD WALL WC- WALL FINISH WB- BASE T.O. CAP 2'-5" A.F.F. FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH PLAN WAINSCOT AT EXISTING WALL GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT PARTITION TYPES, DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAIL Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A03

298 F DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT RCP GENERAL NOTES:. ALL GWB CEILING TO BE PAINTED PT-2, U.N.O. 2. FOR FINISH SCHEDULE, SEE SHEET -A02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN LEGEND ACT- 2'x2' LAY-IN CEILING GRID CUSTOM COLOR ACT-2 2'x2' LAY-IN CEILING GRID WASHABLE GYPSUM BOARD CEILING ON METAL STUD 0' - 0" FINISH CEILING ELEVATION D RECESSED DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE; SEE ELEC. DWGS. PENDANT MOUNTED DECORATIVE LIGHT FIXTURE; SEE ELEC. DWGS. COORD LOCATION WITH FURNITURE S SMOKE DETECTOR; SEE ELEC. DWGS. F FIRE ALARM; SEE ELEC. DWGS. EXIT SIGN; SEE ELEC. DWGS. SPRINKLER HEAD; SEE FIRE PROTECTION DWGS. 4 -A VENT HOOD, SEE MEP DWG 0" SUPPLY DIFFUSER; SEE MECH. DWGS. EMERGENCY LIGHTING; SEE ELEC. DWGS. 3' - 4 /4" 8' - 0" ACT-2 EQ EQ 4' - 0" RETURN DIFFUSER; SEE MECH. DWGS. 24"X24" ACCESS PANEL LD LINEAR DIFFUSER, SEE MECHANICAL DWGS. 9' - 9" 4' - 0" PT-3 8' - 0" GWB ' - 0" ACT-2 EQ EQ 2' - 4 3/4" 9 3/8" 3 3/4" 9' - 6" GWB LD PT-3 3 ACT- 7' - 0" GWB 2' - 4" -A 6" RICHARD.WEN9BO30TYPE II HEAT ONLY HOOD CT- 2' - 0" CLR ACT-2 CEILING BEYOND HOOD ASSEMBLY PT- PT- IN SEMI-GLOSS FINISH THIS SURFACE ONLY MENU BOARD AND SUB- STRUCTURE, OFCI; PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED ACT-2 PT-3 5/8" GYP. BD. ON 3-5/8" 20 GA 6" O.C. MIN PT-3 E 2 -A LD 7' - 0" GWB LD 7' - 0" GWB LD 2' - 0" GWB 2' - 0" GWB 3' - 0" 2' - 0" GWB LD F ACT GRID START POINT ' - 0 3/6" 6 /2" ' - 2" 2' - 0" ACT- 2' - 0" GWB 7' - 0" ACT- 3' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" ACT GRID START POINT 9" ' - 0" ' - 0" 7' - 0" GWB ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com I ON 4 ABP KITCHEN SECTION -A SCALE: " = '-0" 3-5/8" METAL 6" O.C. ' - 0" ST MEZZ 8' - 0" ACT- EXISTING FLOOR STRUCTURE SEALANT 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PT-5 2ND FLOOR 30' - 0" LD 7' - 0" GWB 3' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" SEE DRAWING -A67 FOR WORK IN THESE AREAS NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O E T C T LI H C F F O A R D R E 5' - 0" 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PT-2 3-5/8" METAL 6" O.C. ST MEZZ 8' - 0" LD E STAT G R E E T S I 0/4/207 2:9:22 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt PT-2 ACT- 3 CEILING TRANSITION DETAIL -A SCALE: /2" = '-0" -A -A LINEAR DIFFUSER 5/8" GYPSUM CEILING BOARD INTERIOR, PT-5 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 3-5/8" METAL 6" O.C. LINEAR DIFFUSER 5' - 0" ' - 0" 5/8" GYPSUM CEILING BOARD INTERIOR, PT-5 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 6" 5 SOFFIT DETAIL 6" 6" 2 SOFFIT DETAIL ' - 5 /8" 8 /2" 5/8" GYPSUM CEILING BOARD INTERIOR, PT-5 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PT-3 EXISTING CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM TO REMAIN SOFFIT HEIGHT 7' - 0" EXISTING EXTERIOR CONCRETE SOFFIT ASSEMBLY EXISTING CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM TO REMAIN ST MEZZ 8' - 0" EXISTING EXTERIOR CONCRETE SOFFIT ASSEMBLY CEILING HEIGHT 2' - 0" G 5 -A 7' - 0" GWB SEE DRAWING -A67 FOR WORK IN THIS AREA PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -A SCALE: /4" = '-0" F GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A

299 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT ELEVATIONS GENERAL NOTES:. FOR FINISH SCHEDULE, SEE SHEET -A02 PAINT PT-5 4 -A33 4 -A33 PAINT PT-5 5' - 0" EQ EQ EQ EQ 3' - 2 /2" EQ EQ EQ EQ PAINT PT-5 ALIGN ST- 5 -A33 NOTE: ALL GLAZING PANELS GL-2 AS SPECIFIED THIS ELEVATION NEW VERTICAL MULLIONS NEW GLASS PANEL, MATCH FINISH AND TYPE TO EXISTING PANELS IN CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM NEW ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND SUB-FRAME ST- ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 7 04 VESTIBULE INTERIOR ELEVATION - SOUTH -A2 SCALE: /4" = '-0" 2' - 3 /2" 5 5/8" NOTE: ALL GLAZING PANELS GL-2 AS SPECIFIED THIS ELEVATION ST-, ALIGN VERTICAL JOINTS WITH CURTAIN WALL VERTICAL MULLIONS 6 04 VESTIBULE INTERIOR ELEVATION - WEST -A2 SCALE: /4" = '-0" +/- 7' - 3/4" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 2' - 0" GL-2 GL-2A CENTER JOINT ON TENNANT DEMISING PARTITION ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 5 04 VESTIBULE INTERIOR ELEVATION - NORTH -A2 SCALE: /4" = '-0" 2' - 0" +/- 7' - 3/4" 3 -A33 NOTE: ALL GLAZING PANELS GL-2 AS SPECIFIED THIS ELEVATION 4 04 VESTIBULE INTERIOR ELEVATION - EAST -A2 SCALE: /4" = '-0" ST- ST FLOOR 0' - 0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com I ON NOTICE 4 -A3 F E 2ND FLOOR 30' - 0" THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T I H C T LC A R F D E R E E T STAT S G R E I 0/4/207 2:25:09 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD, SEE SHEET -A92 FOR DETAILS. STARBUCKS DISC BLADE SIGN, SEE SHEET -A5. GLASS SWING DOOR PANEL WITH EGRESS HARDWARE, PART OF FOLDING GLASS PANEL PARTITION ASSEMBLY 0" BOTTOM RAIL AT EXIT DOOR ONLY 9' - 0 5/8" -A2 3 -A3 25 -A3 -A3 (6) EQ PANELS -A5 0 -A3 -A32 7 -A3 6 -A3 (6) EQ PANELS (6) EQ PANELS GL- GL-A GL- GL- FOLDING GLASS PANEL PARTITON AS SPECIFIED STARBUCKS SIGNAGE PANEL, SEE SHEET -A5. 2 /2" 9' - 3" 2 /2" 3' - 2 /4" 2' - 8" 3' - 2 /4" 9' - 8" ATRIUM ELEVATION SCALE: /4" = '-0" GL-A GL- PAINT PT-5, TYP FOLDING GLASS PANEL PARTITON AS SPECIFIED ST FLOOR 0' - 0" EXISTING BASE TRIM NEW BASE TRIM, MATCH MATERIAL TO ADJACENT EXISTING BASE TRIM GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A2

300 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT GENERAL NOTES - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. FOR ALL EQUIPMENT TAGS, SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ON SHEET -A0. 2. FOR FINISH SCHEDULE, SEE SHEET -A A 3 -A E PT-2 COLUMN BUILDOUT BEYOND, PAINT PT- ALL SIDES COLUMN COVER, PAINT PT- ALL SIDES PT-3.7 B.O. LIGHT FIXTURE 7'-0" 6.2 B.O. LIGHT FIXTURE 8'-0" B.O. LIGHT FIXTURE 7'-0" PT- PL-3 EXISTING HORN STROBE FIRE ALARM AND WALL RECEPTACLE TO REMAIN, SEE ELEC. CTB CTB-2 ST FLOOR 0' - 0" COLUMN COVER, PAINT PT- ALL SIDES RICHARD.WEN9BO ".6 PT- 3 ABP OVERALL - SOUTH -A22 SCALE: /4" = '-0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T PT-2 8' - 3" 4 -A.7 9' - 0" ABP KITCHEN ELEVATION - EAST -A22 SCALE: /4" = '-0" CTB-2 ST FLOOR 0' - 0" PT-2 PT # RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com PT PT-.2.3 WT-.5 9" 4' - 6" PT- 6. 3' - 6" PT-3 SSM-2 CAP PT- PT-2 B.O. LIGHT FIXUTRE 7'-0" CTB-2 WC- 8" TYP 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 3' - 0" CTB-2 ST FLOOR 0' - 0" NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H E T C T LI H CTB ST FLOOR 0' - 0" CTB-2 PL- ON ALL SIDES PL- ON MDF PANEL DOORS AND S.S. SELF-CLOSING CONTINUOUS HINGES ST FLOOR 0' - 0" CTB-2 O E O F STAT G I C A R E T S D R E 6 ABP KITCHEN ELEVATION - WEST -A22 SCALE: /4" = '-0" 5 ABP MAIN COUNTER - SOUTH -A22 SCALE: /4" = '-0" 2 ABP OVERALL - EAST -A22 SCALE: /4" = '-0" R E 0/4/207 2:26:26 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt -A22 SCALE: /4" = '-0" PT-3.7 PT- CTB-2 4 ABP MAIN COUNTER - NORTH PT-4 2 -A E PT-5 PT-4 5 -AD2 PT-5 4 -AD2 ST FLOOR 0' - 0" -A22 PT-2 PT-2 SCALE: /4" = '-0" 4 -A PT-3 PT- CT WALL-MOUNT EXIT SIGN CTB CTB-2 CTB-2 ABP OVERALL - WEST PT- PT-2 WC- EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME, PAINT THIS SIDE PT-2 SSM-2 CAP PT-2 2' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" -A03 8" TYP B.O. LIGHT FIXTURE 7'-0" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A22

301 DATES AND REVISIONS 4'-0" o.c. EXTEND STUD SAME HEIGHT AS EXISTING ADJACENT. PROVIDE KICKER/LATERAL BRACING TO MATCH EXISTING. ALERT ARCHITECT IF NO LATERAL BRACING FOUND. 4'-0" o.c. CLEAR ANODIZED BRAKE METAL TRIM SEALANT; /4" MAX 2.5 2ND FLOOR 30' - 0" INTERIOR DETAIL GENERAL NOTES:. /4" STONE SILLS AND PANELS TO BE CLEVELAND BLACK POLISHED A GRANITE BY CLEVELAND MARBLE MOSAIC COMPANY. PROVIDE SAMPLE TO CONFIRM PRODUCT MATCHES EXISTING GRANITE ON BUILDING EXTERIOR. 2. FINISH CURTAIN WALL MULLIONS, FOLDING PARTITION METAL RAILS, AND ASSOCIATED METAL TRIMS TO MATCH EXISTING EXTERIOR CURTAIN WALLS ON SAME FLOOR. No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT 8" 8" (2) #0 SDS PER STUD STUD BLOCKING TOP AND BOTTOM 8 o.c. /2" MDF BACKING (4) #0 SDS T/SHELF EL. 8 o.c. B/SHELF EL. 7'-2" MIN. A.F.F. P-LAM FINISH TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT, WRAP AT CORNERS RICHARD.WEN9BO30STUD BLOCKING TYP. SEALANT, BOTH SIDES 6 o.c. 8 o.c. STUD /3 POINTS F STEEL POST, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG STEEL TUBE, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG 2.5 6" METAL 6" O.C. AND SOUND BATT INSULATION FULL WIDTH OF STUDS NOTE: SEE LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING NOTES ON DWG. -S0 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD STEEL TUBE, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG 2 SECTION -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" SECTION -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" 6" METAL 6" O.C. SOUND BATT INSULATION, FULL WIDTH OF STUDS 3 5/8" METAL 6" O.C. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT BOTH SIDES DEFLECTION TRACK ' - /2" 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD 6" 20 GA METAL 6" O.C. MAX AND SOUND BATT INSULATION FULL WIDTH OF STUDS OF TUBE SEALANT; /4" MAX 0 METAL COLUMN BOX OUT -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" CLEAR ANODIZED BRAKE METAL TRIM 4 FRAMED WALL HEAD -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" BRACE TO STRUCTURE AS NEEDED 3 ATRIUM CURTAIN WALL HEAD -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" CEILING AS SCHEDULED WHERE INDICATED CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T /2" OF TUBE CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED SEALANT; 3/8" MAX 0' - 6 /4" ' - /2" /2" OF TUBE CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED SEALANT; 3/8" MAX 0' - 6 /4" ' - /2" /2" OF TUBE CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED SEALANT; 3/8" MAX 0' - 6 /4" ' - /2" RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com BRAKE METAL TRIM BRAKE METAL TRIM BRAKE METAL TRIM STEEL TUBE, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG STEEL TUBE, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG STEEL TUBE, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG 7 /2" ' - 7 3/4" 7 /2" ' - 7 3/4" OF PARTITION CONTINUOUS STRUCTURAL PLATES GUSSETS 2' - 0 /2" 7 /2" ' - 7 3/4" OF PARTITION 2' - 0 /2" NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. L-ANGLE FOLDING PARTITION HEAD TRACK METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD, SEE SHEET -A92 FOR DETAILS. FOLDING PARTITION HEAD TRACK I 0 H O E T I H C A R F C T L9' - 0 5/8" 9' - 0 5/8" 9' - 0 5/8" O E D R E SEALANT; 3/8" MAX 2 /2" SEALANT; /4" MAX STAT G R E E T S I /2" CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED COUNTER- SUNK SCREW SEALANT; /4" MAX FRAMELESS GLASS FOLDING PARTITION AS SPECIFIED 0/4/207 2:26:35 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt 7 ATRIUM CURTAIN WALL TRANSOM -A3 -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" SCALE: 3" = '-0" 5/8" 2.5 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED BRAKE METAL TRIM NEW EPOXY TERRAZZO FLOOR FINISH EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB 6 ATRIUM CURTAIN WALL FLOOR ST FLOOR 0' - 0" CEMENTITIOUS LEVELING COMPOUNG -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" FRAMELESS GLASS FOLDING PARTITION AS SPECIFIED 5 FOLDING PARTITION HEAD - STARBUCKS 2 FOLDING PARTITION HEAD - ABP -A3 FOLDING PARTITION SILL -A3 SCALE: 3" = '-0" SCALE: 3" = '-0" 2.5 FRAMELESS GLASS FOLDING PARTITION AS SPECIFIED CERAMIC TILE FLOOR FINISH, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOLDING PARTITION GUIDE CHANNEL PEMKO 766 ALUMINUM THRESHOLD IN MILL FINISH ALUMINUM OR EQUAL NEW EPOXY TERRAZZO FLOOR FINISH EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB ST FLOOR 0' - 0" CEMENTITIOUS LEVELING COMPOUNG GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT INTERIOR DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A3

302 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD, SEE SHEET -A92 FOR DETAILS SEALANT AND BACKER ROD FRAMELESS GLASS FOLDING PARTITION AS SPECIFIED /2" PLYWOOD BACKER BOARD WOOD PANEL WALL FINISH, SEE SHEET -A72 FOR DETAILS CUSTOM MILLWORK - SB/GC, SEE -A65 AND -A66 FOR INFORMATION 6" BATT INSULATION 6" METAL 6" O.C. 3 ATRIUM FOLDING PARTITION JAMB - STARBUCKS -A32 SCALE: 3" = '-0" 2.5 ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T 2.5 2' - 5" ' - 7" FRAMELESS GLASS FOLDING PARTITION AS SPECIFIED 6" METAL 6" O.C. 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD 2' - 5" ' - 7" CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED SEALANT; 3/8" MAX 6" METAL 6" O.C. 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL, SEE ELEVATIONS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com 0/4/207 2:27:4 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt RICHARD.WEN9BO30ABP DINING COUNTER, SEE PLAN E STEEL POST, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG 6" METAL 6" O.C. SEALANT; 3/8" MAX CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED 6" METAL 6" O.C. EXISTING STEEL STRUCTURE 2 ATRIUM CURTAIN WALL AND FOLDING PARTITION JAMB - ABP -A32 SCALE: 3" = '-0" 6" BATT INSULATION 6" METAL 6" O.C. 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD SEE PLAN SEE PLAN 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD STARBUCKS COUNTER, SEE PLAN /4" F " 4 3/6" 9 5/8" STEEL POST, SEE STRUCTURAL DWG 6" METAL 6" O.C. FRAMELESS GLASS FOLDING PARTITION AS SPECIFIED 6" METAL 6" O.C. 6" METAL 6" O.C. 6" BATT INSULATION EXISTING STEEL STRUCTURE 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD, SEE SHEET -A92 FOR ASSEMBLY DETAILS ATRIUM CURTAIN WALL AND FOLDING PARTITION JAMB - STARBUCKS -A32 SCALE: 3" = '-0" 6" 5/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD SEE PLAN SEE PLAN NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O E O F I 0 STAT GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: G R E I E T S FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT INTERIOR DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A32 E T I H C A R D R E C T L

303 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT 4 -A33 2 /4" 5' - 0" NEW 8" FROST SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 4' - 6" 04A 5 -A33 4' - 9 5/8" 3' - 2" ' - 5 /8" 3 -A33 ' - 0" 5' - 7 /4" 8' - 9" 3' - 7 /2" 5' - 9 /4" NEW CONCRETE RAMP 2 /4" RICHARD.WEN9BO302 -A33 ' - 3" ' - 3" ' - 3" ' - 0" DN ' - 0" EDGE OF RAMP SLOPE 04B 04C 2 /4" 2' - 6 /2" 4' - /4" 3' - 0 3/4" 3' - 0 3/4" 4' - /4" 3' - 0" 8 /2" VESTIBULE ENLARGED PLAN -A33 SCALE: /2" = '-0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T WOOD BLOCKING 5/8" CEILING GYP. BD. & 3 5/8" MTL. STD. SEE RCP. BACKER ROD AND JOINT SEALANT ON BOTH SIDES CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM STRUCTURE ABOVE DEFLECTION TRACK 6" MTL. STD. 5/8" GYP. BD. SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM. SEE RCP. EXTERIOR EXISTING EXTERIOR CURTAIN WALL EXISTING EXTERIOR CONCRETE SILL; PATCH AND REPAIR WATERPROOF MEMBRANE AS NEEDED /4" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" /4" STONE PANEL MORTARED TO EXISTING CONCRETE EXTERIOR WALL NEW WALKOFF MAT NEW CONCRETE SLAB T.O. LANDING - 0' - 8 3/4" 2' - 0" ' - 3" ' - 3" 9" VIF (2) EQ RISERS -/2'' DIA. NPS HANDRAIL AND POSTS MITRED AND WELDED CONNECTIONS SEALANT " NEW CONCRETE SLAB 3/4" ' - " 2" 2' - 0" PERT-2 STAIR TREAD & RISER ERT-B; ALIGN FINISH ELEVATION WITH TOP OF FLOOR FINISH IN ADJACENT SPACES ST FLOOR 0' - 0" T.O. LANDING -0' - 8 3/4'' EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O E O F I Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com E T I H C A R C T LD R E 5 SILL DETAIL -A33 SCALE: 3" = '-0" 2 STAIR DETAIL -A33 SCALE: " = '-0" STAT G R E E T S I 0/4/207 2:27:26 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt -A33 BACKER ROD AND JOINT SEALANT ON BOTH SIDES WOOD BLOCKING CONCRETE BASE. SEE STRUCTURAL PLANS NEW WALKOFF MAT ON NEW CONCRETE SLAB SCALE: 3" = '-0" /4" ST /4" ST /4" 4 CURTAIN WALL SECTION CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM EXISTING FLOOR FINISHING ST FLOOR 0' - 0" WOOD BLOCKING T.O. LANDING - 0' - 8 3/4" ERT-B -A33 SCALE: " = '-0" 4" 3 RAMP DETAIL ' - 0" EQ MITRED WELDED CONNECTIONS ERT-B EQ -/2" DIA. NPS HANDRAIL AND POSTS MITRED WELDED CONNECTIONS 8' - 9" ' - 0" EQ WM- 3/8" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" T.O. LANDING - 0' - 8 3/4" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT VESTIBULE ENLARGED PLAN AND DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A33

304 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT 8' - 0" EQ. EQ. EQ. -A4 4 GROMMET TRIM, VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION WITH OWNER, TYP. SSM-2 COUNTERTOP GENERAL NOTES - CABINET DETAILS. SEE SHEETS -A2 AND -A22 FOR FINISHES LEGEND. 2. FOR EACH CABINET DOOR, PROVIDE STYLMARK /4" PULL IN 28 FINISH, IVES 323 MAGNETIC CATCH, AND -/2" CONTINUOUS HINGE 26D BRISH CHROME FINISH, TYPICAL 3. PROVIDE (4) SUPPORT PINS AT EACH ADJUSTABLE SHELF. 3 -A4 2' - 8" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 2' - 8" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP SUPPORT RIBS MTL-2 ACCENT 2' - 5 /2" 2' - 8" CABINETS BELOW ' - /32" 4 5/32" ' - 6" 2" 2' - 0" MTL-2 ACCENT PL- 2" PL- 3/4" ALMOND MELAMINE SHELF AND PIN SUPPORTS 2" ' - 2" ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR MTL- KICKPLATE MTL- KICKPLATE 2 -A4 6 /4" 2' - 2 /2" 3" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 2' - 2 /2" 3" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" SODA CABINET PLAN -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 2 SODA COUNTER SECTION -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 3 SODA CABINET SIDE ELEVATION -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" WALL BEYOND SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 6 /4" ' - /2" /4"3 /2" /2" 8' - 0" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL-2 ACCENT PL- MTL- KICKPLATE 7 3/4" 6 /4" -A A4 -A4 3' - 2 3/6" 7 8 3/6" 2' - 6" 8" CABINETS BELOW 2' - 0" 2' - 6" BASKETS OFOI 0 -A4 5 /4" ' - 7" 9 /2" ' - 0" MTL-2 ACCENT PL- T SLOT WITH ALUM/ INSERT ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR MTL- KICKPLATE ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com I ON 4 SODA CABINET FRONT ELEVATION -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 5 POS PLAN -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 9 -A4 GROMMET TRIM, VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION WITH OWNER. SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 6 POS SECTION -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 3" 2' - 2 3/4" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T C T LI H C A R F D E R E E T STAT S G R E I 0/4/207 2:28:5 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt 2' - 0" 7" ' - 0 3/4" 3 /2" 7 POS ELEVATION -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 2' - 6" 4" 4" 3' - 2 5/6" 9 /2" ' - 0" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL-2 ACCENT PL- T-SLOT W/ALUM. INSERT MTL- KICK PLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 2' - 6" EQ. EQ. EQ. 5" 3 /2" /2" 7 3/4" 8 3/4" 3/4" " /2" 2' - 5 3/4" 8 POS CASHIER ELEVATION SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL-2 ACCENT ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR PL- MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 8 3/6" 9 POS SIDE ELEVATION 2' - 6" 4" 4" 2' - 5 3/4" ' - 0" 9 3/8" 3 /2" ' - 0 3/4" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL-2 ACCENT PL- T-SLOT W/ALUM. INSERT MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" -A4 SCALE: /2" = '-0" ' - 0 3/4" 3 /2" 0 POS FRONT ELEVATION 2' - 6" 4" 4" 2' - 5 3/4" ' - 0" 9 3/8" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL-2 ACCENT PL- T-SLOT W/ALUM. INSERT MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT CABINET DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A4

305 GENERAL NOTES - CABINET DETAILS DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT. SEE SHEETS -A2 AND -A22 FOR FINISHES LEGEND. 2. FOR EACH CABINET DOOR, PROVIDE STYLMARK /4" PULL IN 28 FINISH, IVES 323 MAGNETIC CATCH, AND -/2" CONTINUOUS HINGE 26D BRISH CHROME FINISH, TYPICAL 3. PROVIDE (4) SUPPORT PINS AT EACH ADJUSTABLE SHELF. ' - 0 5/8" CUTLERY TOP 6" ' - 0" 4 -A42 3/6" ' - 7 /2" 3/6" -A42 3 ' - 6" OPEN 2 /8" 9" 6 7/8" LOWER TRASH CABINET PLAN -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" ' - /8" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 2 -A42 CABINET BELOW ' - 0" 6" UPPER SSM-2 COUNTERTOP CUTLERY STATION /4" 3/4" ' - 9 /8" 3/4" /4" 8" OPEN PL- 4" 3' - 3" /2" 5 3/4" 3/4" /2" 3' - 7 /2" STAINLESS TRAY WITH DIVIDERS SSM-2 COUNTERTOP STAINLESS STEEL PLATE PL- FULL LENGTH CHROME PIANO HINGE MAGNETIC LATCH EXTRUDED ALUM. ANGLE " X " BLACK MELAMINE INTERIOR EXTRUDED ALUM. U CHANNEL 3/4" X 7/8" X 3/4" (4) 3" SWIVEL CASTER (2) LOCKING PER UNIT 3' - 7 /2" 8" 4" 3' - 3" /2" 5 3/4" 3/4" /2" CUSTOM SS TRAY SSM-2 COUNTERTOP PL- PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION, PAINT PT- CTB-2 4" 2' - 6 /4" 8" 3/4" /2" CUTLERY TOPPER CUSTOM SS TRAY SSM-2 COUNTERTOP BLACK INTERIOR PL- RUBBERMAID RIGID LINER # "W X 4.2"D X 28"H 3/4" /8" ' - 3 /4" /8" 3/4" 4 7/8" 3/4" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" ' - 5 3/4" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" ' - 6" ST-2 COUNTERTOP 3/4" PLYWOOD; PAINT VISIBLE SURFACES TO MATCH ST-2 2 TRASH FRONT ELEVATION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 3 TRASH SIDE ELEVATION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 4 TRASH CABINET SECTION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP SSM-2 COUNTERTOP ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T 3' - 6" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" SURFACE MOUNTED COUNTER SUPPORT, RAKKS #EH-22 AT EACH MULLION; PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT CURTAIN WALL MULLIONS LAGRANGE 2000 SERIES PLUGMOLD CURTAIN WALL MULLION NOTE: PROVIDE FLOATING WALL MOUNT BRACKET BY CENTERLINE WHERE END OF COUNTER TERMINATES INTO DEMISING PARTITION. DEMO EXISTING GYP BOARD AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL BRACKET. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SUPPORT AS REQUIRED. PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BOARD. 8 -A42 -A42 7 2' - 2" 6 SSM-2 COUNTERTOP CABINET BELOW -A42 2' - 0" 6" ' - 3/4" /4"3 /2" /2" 2' - 0" ' - /2" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL-2 ACCENT PL- MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 2' - 0" 6" ' - 3/4" /4" 3 /2" /2" 2' - 2" 3" ' - 0 /2" MTL-2 ACCENT PL- MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 2' - 0" 6" ' - /4" /4" 4" /2" 2' - 2" ' - 0 /2" 3" SUPPORT RIB MT-2 ACCENT PL- ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 9 BAR COUNTER SECTION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 5 HOT HOLD CABINET PLAN -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 6 HOT HOLD FRONT ELEVATION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 7 HOT HOLD SIDE ELEVATION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 8 HOT HOLD CABINET SECTION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T I C T LH C A R F D E R E E T STAT S G R E I 0/4/207 2:28:39 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt PL- SHROUD SSM-2 COUNTERTOP PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION, PL- ALL SIDES 3/4" ALMOND MELAMINE SHELF ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR MTL- KICKPLATE CTB-2 /2" -A42 5' - 4 /4" 5" 3' - 7/8" SSM-2 CAP 3/4" 2' - 0" 3/4" 2' - 4" 3/4" 0 ESPRESSO COUNTER ELEVATION -A42 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 8" 4" 3/4" 9" 3/4" 9" 3/4" 8 3/4" " 2' - 0" PL- (ON SIDE PANEL) ST FLOOR 0' - 0" PL- PL- REMOVABLE PANEL 8" " 2' - 3" PL- /2" -A42 5" 2 5/8" PL- SCALE: /2" = '-0" 3' - 0" ESPRESSO COUNTER SECTION SSM-2 COUNTERTOP OUTWATER #5/6-8 LEVELER 3/4" ALMOND MELAMINE SHELF ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 2' - 3/4" -A42 SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 2 ESPRESSO COUNTER PLAN SCALE: /2" = '-0" OPEN SPACE BELOW FOR EQUIPMENT, SEE SHEET -A0 -A42 4' - 0 3/8" 3' - 7/8" 5" -A42 0 7" OPEN SHELVES BELOW 2' - 4" DIPPER WELL, SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE SSSM-2 CAP GROMMET TRIM, VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION WITH OWNER. GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT CABINET DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A42

306 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT -A43 3 3' - 0" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP GENERAL NOTES - CABINET DETAILS. SEE SHEETS -A2 AND -A22 FOR FINISHES LEGEND. 2. FOR EACH CABINET DOOR, PROVIDE STYLMARK /4" PULL IN 28 FINISH, IVES 323 MAGNETIC CATCH, AND -/2" CONTINUOUS HINGE 26D BRISH CHROME FINISH, TYPICAL 3. PROVIDE (4) SUPPORT PINS AT EACH ADJUSTABLE SHELF. CABINETS BELOW SHELVING BY OWNER SHELVING BY OWNER -A RICHARD.WEN9BO30-A43 6' - 6" ' - 8" ' - 8" SELF-SERVE SOUP CABINET PLAN -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" -A43 8 3' - 0" 4" 0 3/4" ' - 0" 0 3/4" EQ. EQ. EQ. SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 3" HOLE IN COUTNER W/ COVER; TYP SLOTS IN TOP OF CABINET FOR WIRE ACCESS PL- 2' - 4" 6 /4" PL- 2' - 0" 2' - 4" /2" 2 SELF-SERVE SOUP FRONT ELEVATION -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" OPENING RUNS LENGTH OF TOP FIX PANEL FOR (3) QUAD OUTLET BOXES PRE-WIRED TO JUNCTION JUNCTION BOX 2' - 0" /2" 2' - 0" 3' - 0" 4 SELF SERVE SOUP CABINET SECTION -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 4" 3/4" PL- SLOTS IN TOP OF CABINET BLOCKING REMOVABLE PANEL 3 9/6" 4" 3/4" ' - 4" 3/4" 6 /4" SSM-2 /4" ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR PL- ST FLOOR 0' - 0" SSM-2 MTL-2 ACCENT PL- MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 2' - 4" 4" 6 /4" ' - 9 /4" /2" 2' - 0" 6 /4" ' - 3/4" 3 SELF-SERVE SOUP SIDE ELEVATION -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" " " 2" ' - 0" 7/8" EQ EQ 5 SELF-SERVE COFFEE CABINET SECTION -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" /2" 3 /2" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL-2 ACCENT PL- MTL- ST FLOOR 0' - 0" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR 3/4" ALMOND MELAMINE SHELF AND PIN SUPPORTS PL- MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com I ON NOTICE -A43 7 ' - 2 /2" 3/4" ' - /4" 3/4" CABINETS BELOW PL- 3/4" ' - /4" 3/4" ' - 2 /2" 3/4" ' - 4" 3/4" ' - 2 /2" 3/4" ' - /4" 3/4" EQ PL- FIXED SHELF, PROVIDE LOCKING SHELF REST MTL-2 ACCENT SSM-2 2' - 0" ' - 3/4" 3 /2" /2" 3' - 0" SSM-2 MTL-2 ACCENT PL- THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O E O F I 0 STAT E T G R E I C T LH I C A R E T S D R E 0/4/207 2:28:5 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt 5 -A43 6' - 6" 7" -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" R 0' - 3" EQ EQ 6 SELF-SERVE COFFEE CABINET PLAN 3/4" ' - /4" 3/4" ' - 2 /2" 3/4" ' - 4" 3/4" CABINETS BELOW PROVIDE TRASH LINER BELOW -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" PL- PL- 7 SELF-SERVE COFFEE FRONT ELEVATION EQ PL- MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 6 /4" 8 SELF-SERVE COFFEE SIDE ELEVATION -A43 SCALE: /2" = '-0" MTL- KICKPLATE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT CABINET DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A43

307 8' - 5" 2 -A44 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT -A44 3 SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 3' - 6" 8' - 5" " 8' - 3" " ' - 6" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 5 -A44 3' - 6" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP " ' - 2" EQ EQ EQ 4" 2' - 6" /2" " ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR 3/4" ALMOND MELAMINE SHELF MTL- BASE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR 3 -A44 8 /2" ALMOND MELAMINE 6' - " OPENING -A44 ' - 2" ' - 2" 7 SANDWICH COUNTER PLAN -A44 SCALE: /2" = '-0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T 6 WRAP ELEVATION -A44 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 3/4" 3/4" ALMOND MELAMINE SHELF AND PIN SUPPORTS 2" 3/4" 2' - 5 7/8" 5 WRAP SECTION -A44 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 4 5/8" 2 5/8" 2" /2" 4" PL- BASE 2' - 3" 6" PL- REMOVABLE PANEL OUTWATER #5/6-8 LEVELER ST FLOOR 0' - 0" 7 -A44 3 -A44 T-SLOT W/ALUM. INSERT PL- GRAIN 4" 4" 4" 33 5/8" 33 5/8" REMOVABLE FRONT PANELS, PL- 4 SANDWICH COUNTER FRONT ELEVATION -A44 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 33 5/8" 2 -A44 4" PL- BASE 6" 0 /8" ' - 0" 4 7/8" ST FLOOR 0' - 0" RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com E T I H C T LC A R F D E STAT R E E T CHECK HOLDER RAIL BY OWNER; GLASS CLIP ATTACHMENT AND INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR ' - 2" 7/8" G R E S I 0/4/207 2:29:02 PM C:\Revit Projects\ Cleveland Medical Mart_hflick.rvt 5 -A44 SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 3/4" 3 WRAP PLAN -A44 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 3' - 6" ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR PL- 4" EQ EQ ' - 6" 4 -A44 ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR FACE MOUNTED 3/4" X 3/4" ALUM. ANGLE " 2' - 5" 4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" NOTE: ALL GLASS PANELS TO BE TEMPERED /2" THICK GLASS END PANEL BEYOND SSM-2 COUNTERTOP 2' - 8 /8" 3/4" ALMOND MELAMINE SHELF AND PIN SUPPORTS 3' - 6" 4" 2" HAFELE # LEVELER 2" 3/4" 2' - 5 /2" 3/4" 2 /4" 2 SANDWICH COUNTER SECTION -A44 SCALE: /2" = '-0" 6 7/8" 6 5/8" 3 /4" 5" 2" /2" ' - 0" ' - 4" 4" ' - 2" 5/8" 2' - 3" 6" " -/4" DIA GLASS SHELF CLIPS /2" THICK GLASS SHELVES PL- REMOVABLE PANEL T-SLOT W/ALUM. INSERT PL- BASE OUTWATER #5/6-8 LEVELER VERTICAL SUPPORTS WITH WIRING 24" O.C. MAX. ST FLOOR 0' - 0" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL- BASE /2" " " -A44 4" 2' - 5" 3/4" ' - 2" 2' - 0" ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR LOCKING SHELF REST MI ALMOND MELAMINE ' - 2" 6' - " ' - 2" SANDWICH COUNTER REAR ELEVATION SCALE: /2" = '-0" 8' - 5" ALMOND MELAMINE INTERIOR LOCKING SHELF REST /2" SSM-2 COUNTERTOP MTL- BASE ST FLOOR 0' - 0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT CABINET DETAILS Author Checker 8832 DRAWING NO. -A44

308 FL.RICHARDBOWEN930DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT BID/PERMIT - OCTOBER 4, 207 STARBUCKS GENERAL INFORMATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES PERSPECTIVE VIEW 0/4/207 2:52:36 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt 3PL THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS AC AIR CONDITIONING ACC ACCESSIBLE ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ADJ ADJUSTABLE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AHJ AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AMP AMPERE AOR ARCHITECT OF RECORD APPROX APPROXIMATE BOH BACK OF HOUSE BLDG BUILDING CAB CABINET CKT CIRCUIT CL CENTER LINE CLG CEILING CLR CLEAR OR CLEARANCE COL COLUMN COMP COMPARTMENT CONST CONSTRUCTION CONT CONTINUOUS CTR CENTER CW COLD WATER CWF COLD WATER FILTERED CX COMMISSIONING CXA COMMISSIONING AGENT DEG DEGREES DET DETAIL DIA DIAMETER DID DESIGN IDENTIFICATION NUMBER DISP DISPENSER DIM DIMENSION DM STARBUCKS DESIGN MANAGER DN DOWN DWG(S) DRAWING(S) EA EACH EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EG EXHAUST GRILLE EL ELEVATION ELEC ELECTRICAL EM EMERGENCY EQ EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT EXIST OR (E) EXISTING EXP EXPOSED EXT EXTERIOR FC STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT FD FLOOR DRAIN FF&E FURNITURE, FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT F&I FURNISH AND INSTALL FIN FINISH FLR FLOOR FOH FRONT OF HOUSE FRP FIBERGLAS REINFORCED PANEL FS FLOOR SINK FT FOOT OR FEET GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GND GROUND HC HOLLOW CORE HDW HARDWARE HM HOLLOW METAL HORIZ HORIZONTAL HR HOUR HS HAND SINK HT HEIGHT HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING HW HOT WATER ID INSIDE DIAMETER LC LICENSEE LL LANDLORD LV LOW VOLTAGE MAX MAXIMUM MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MECH MECHANICAL MEP MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING MFR MANUFACTURER MIN MINIMUM MS MOP SINK NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NTS NOT TO SCALE OA OVER ALL OC ON CENTER OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PD STARBUCKS PRODUCTION DESIGNER PDM STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE POS POINT OF SALE R RADIUS REF REFERENCE REQ( D) REQUIRE(D) REV REVISION RG RETURN GRILLE RND ROUND RT ROOF TOP SB STARBUCKS SC SOLID CORE SF SQUARE FEET SHT SHEET SIM SIMILAR SPEC SPECIFICATION SQ SQUARE SST STAINLESS STEEL SUSP SUSPENDED TEL TELEPHONE TEMP TEMPORARY TW TEMPERED WATER TYP TYPICAL UC UNDERCOUNTER UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VD VENDOR DIRECT VERT VERTICAL VIF VERIFY IN FIELD W SANITARY WASTE WH WATER HEATER WP WEATHER PROOF WCO WALL CLEANOUT. LICENSEE SHALL HIRE ARCHITECT AND/OR ENGINEERS OF RECORD TO ENGAGE IN LOCAL CODE REVIEW AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PERMITTING AND CODE COMPLIANCE, INCLUDING THE COMPLETION AND SUBMISSION OF STAMPED CONSTRUCTION PLANS ACCEPTABLE FOR PERMIT FILING. LICENSEE SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL COSTS AND COMPLIANCE ASSOCIATED WITH CODES, FIELD CONDITIONS, AND GOVERNING AGENCY REQUIREMENTS. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE, REVIEW THE BUILDING SHELL DRAWINGS AS SUBMITTED BY THE LICENSEE'S ARCHITECT AND BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING OR CONSTRUCTION. 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSULT WITH LICENSEE'S ARCHITECT AND STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER TO RESOLVE ANY CHANGES, OMISSIONS OR PLAN DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO BIDDING OR CONSTRUCTION. 4. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL, COUNTY, STATE AND FEDERAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. 5. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATION OF ALL UTILITIES. 6. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS, INCLUDING CLEARANCES REQUIRED BY OTHER TRADES AND NOTIFY THE LICENSEE'S ARCHITECT AND STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE FACE OF THE FINISHED SURFACE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL DIMENSIONS TO BE TAKEN FROM DESIGNATED DATUM POINT. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. 7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH AND REPAIR ALL EXISTING WALLS, FLOORS, CEILINGS, OR OTHER SURFACES IDENTIFIED TO REMAIN THAT MAY BECOME DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF THE WORK. 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING PERMITS FOR FIRE PROTECTION, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF SUCH SYSTEMS. 9. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL RETAIN ONE SET OF THE PLANS TO NOTE AND DOCUMENT ALL CHANGES DURING CONSTRUCTION. THIS SET SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER FOR RECORD. 0. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING DELIVERY OF MATERIALS FROM STARBUCKS CONTRACTED THIRD PARTY LOGISTICS DISTRIBUTION SERVICES AND VENDOR DIRECT SHIPMENTS.. RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUPPLY AND DELIVERY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT IS IDENTIFIED IN THE DRAWING SCHEDULE SHEETS UNDER THE COLUMN LABELED "RESPONSIBILITY". 2. FOR THE PURPOSE OF THESE DOCUMENTS, TO INSTALL SHALL MEAN TO PROVIDE ALL FASTENERS, MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE, BLOCKING, ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS, PLUMBING CONNECTIONS, AND OTHER ITEMS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL INSTALLATION, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. ALL ITEM SUBSTITUTIONS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE STARBUCKS DESIGN MANAGER. 4. REFER TO ITEM CUTSHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOL LEGEND N NORTH ARROW EXTERIOR ELEVATION CALL-OUT XX SHEET NOTE CALLOUT X REVISION TAG PXXX-ES PAINT TAG Scale: X =X INTERIOR ELEVATION CALL-OUT XXXX AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR HEIGHT TAG GRAPHIC SCALE X XXXXX DESIGN ID TAG SECTION CALL-OUT X' XX" FINISH FACE TO FINISH FACE DIMENSION DXXXXX DOOR TAG DATUM POINT DETAIL CALL-OUT REVISION CLOUD W XXXXX WINDOW TAG CUSTOM DESIGN ID KEY SIGNAGE GRAPHICS AND ARTWORK SITE DOORS DATA DEVICE SPECIALITY EQUIPMENT CASEWORK FURNITURE LIGHTING FIXTURE PLUMBING / MECHANICAL FINISHES - PAINT FINISHES - FLOOR TREATMENT FINISHES - WALL TREATMENT FINISHES - CEILING TREATMENT SCHEDULE PREFIX A - DATA DEVICE SCHEDULE B - WALL BASE SCHEDULE C - CASEWORK SCHEDULE D - DOOR SCHEDULE E - SPECIALTY EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE F - FURNITURE SCHEDULE G - GRAPHICS AND ARTWORK SCHEDULE L - LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE M - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE P - PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE Q - WALL TREATMENT (AREA) SCHEDULE R - WALL TREATMENT (LENGTH) SCHEDULE S - SIGNAGE SCHEDULE T - FLOOR TREATMENT SCHEDULE U - CEILING TREATMENT SCHEDULE W - WINDOW SCHEDULE Y - SITE SCHEDULE RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES SB / GC SB / FC GC / GC LC / GC LC / LC "S" x x0999 "G" x000 - x099 "Y" x00 - x99 "D" x x2999 "A" x x3999 "E" x x4999 "C" x x5999 "F" x x6999 "L" x x7999 "P" / "M" x x8999 x x999 "T" x x9399 "Q" / "R" x x9799 "U" x x9999 FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS NOTICE DRAWING NO. -A50 C I ON ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. O GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION E O STAT H I 0 ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: C T E G R E I S E T GENERAL INFORMATION - STARBUCKS Author Checker T I H C A R D R E

309 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SCHEDULE - "S" RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES SHEET NOTES EXTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. BULB COMMENTS SIGNAGE - DISK 400 SIGN - DISK BLADE ILLUMINATED WALL MOUNTED EVOLVED - 24IN 60MM LC/ LC SB / GC SB / FC GC / GC LC / GC LC / LC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE STARBUCKS DESIGN MANAGER TO COORDINATE SIGNAGE PROPOSAL WITH VENDOR. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATION SHEET -A82 FOR GRAPHIC SCHEDULE. NEW WINDOW SYSTEM FURNISHED AND FINISHED BY GC. COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM AS NEEDED. NANAWALL DOOR AND WINDOW SYSTEM FURNISHED AND FINISHED BY GC. COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM AS NEEDED. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CIRCUIT AND J-BOX WHERE REQUIRED FOR ILLUMINATED SIGNAGE. NEW WALL FINISHES BY GC TO MATCH EXISTING LOBBY FINISHES. AOR TO COORDINATE FINISH TRANSITION WITH ADJACENT TENANTS. A. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE SIGNAGE INSTALLATION WITH THE SIGNAGE CONTRACTOR PROVIDING A MINIMUM SCHEDULING NOTICE OF 4 WEEKS AND WEEK PRIOR TO SCHEDULED DATE OF INSTALLATION. STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER TO PROVIDE GENERAL CONTRACTOR WITH SIGNAGE CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION. B. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS INCLUDING ALL CONDUIT, WIRE, CONNECTIONS, AND BREAKER AT PANEL BOARD NECESSARY TO SERVE SIGNAGE. C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE FIRE TREATED WOOD STUD BLOCKING, OR EQUIVALENT, TO SUPPORT SIGNAGE. D. SIGNAGE CONTRACTOR SHALL ATTAIN LICENSEE'S APPROVAL, OBTAIN PERMIT(S) AND INSTALL SIGNAGE IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL LOCAL JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. E. SIGNAGE CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE LICENSEE, STARBUCKS DESIGN MANAGER AND TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AS NEEDED. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER IMMEDIATELY IF SHOP DRAWINGS OR INSTALLATION IS IN DISCREPANCY WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. F. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CLEAN, PATCH AND REPAIR EXISTING EXTERIOR AS REQUIRED. G. SEE DRAWING -A2 FOR NANAWALL AND WINDOW SYSTEM DETAILS. 2 -A5 7 -A9 2' - 7 3/4" 5 -A9 ALL SIGNAGE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT. ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T GRAPHIC 6' - 2 /2" 0' - 6" UPPER GLAZING NANAWALL DOOR/ WINDOW 5 S 400 9' - 0" 2 -A92 ALIGN ' - 4" 20' - 0 3/4" G X00 2 ALIGN 3' - 6 /2" C X5002 C X508 GRAPHIC ALIGN 3 2 -A9 6' - 2 /2" 0' - 8 /2" C X500 VIF VIF 2' - 6" 9' - 0" ' - 0" RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T I H C A R C T LF D E STAT E T S R E C X5003 3' - 2 /4" G R E I 0/4/207 2:52:43 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt Scale : 3/8" = '-0" 9' - 8" STOREFRONT ELEVATION SIGNAGE ELEVATION - SECTION 2 Scale : 3/8" = '-0" 0 2' 4' 6' Scale: 3/8" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A5

310 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT INTERIOR DOOR SCHEDULE - "D" WALL TYPE LEGEND SHEET NOTES INTERIOR FLOOR PLAN NOTES DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS DOOR 0086 DOOR - SINGLE IMPACT DOUBLE ACTING - 36IN 95MM. ELIASON MODEL SCP-8. GC/ GC TYPE F. FINISH: LAMINATE - FORMICA GRAPHITE 837. FRAME: PAINT TO MATCH P534 / SW7020 INTERIOR DOOR LEGEND TYPE F EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN. 2 NEW PLUMBING WALL TO STRUCTURE (MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM WALL BOARD ON ONE CAFE SIDE) 20 GA 6" (52 MM) METAL STUDS 6" (406 MM) O.C. WITH 5/8" (6 MM) MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD ON CAFE SIDE TO STRUCTURE. SECURE MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD TO STUDS WITH DRYWALL SCREWS AT 0" (254 MM) O.C. AT PANEL EDGES AND 2" (305 MM) O.C. AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. 45 DEGREE METAL STUD 48" (29 MM) O.C. ABOVE CEILING LINE TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. 3 NEW PLUMBING WALL TO 6'-" AFF (MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM WALL BOARD ON BOTH SIDES) 20 GA 6" (52 MM) METAL STUDS 6" (406 MM) O.C. WITH 5/8" (6 MM) MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD ON BOTH SIDES TO STRUCTURE. SECURE MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD TO STUDS WITH DRYWALL SCREWS AT 0" (254 MM) O.C. AT PANEL EDGES AND 2" (305 MM) O.C. AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. 45 DEGREE METAL STUD 48" (29 MM) O.C. ABOVE CEILING LINE TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. 4 NEW PARTITION WALL TO 6'-" AFF (GYPSUM BOARD ON CAFE SIDE) 20 GA 3-5/8" (86 MM) METAL STUDS 6" (406MM) O.C. WITH 5/8" (6 MM) TYPE "X" GWB ON CAFE SIDE TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. DRYWALL 2" (305 MM) O.C. 5 NEW PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL TO 2'-0" AFF (MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM WALL BOARD ON BOTH SIDES) 6 5/8". 5". 5". RICHARD.WEN9BO INSTALL /4" (6MM) GREEN BOARD ON BACKBAR WALL PER SPECIFICATIONS. GC TO PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED ITEMS. NANAWALL DOOR AND WINDOW SYSTEM. SEE DRAWING -A2. COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM AS NEEDED. NEW PROPOSED EXTERIOR ENTRANCE TO BE SPECIFIED AND DETAILED BY AOR. SEE SHEETS -A0 AND -A03. COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM AS NEEDED. NEW WINDOW SYSTEM FURNISHED AND FINISHED BY GC. SEE DRAWING -A2. COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM AS NEEDED. REPLACE EXISTING GYP. BOARD WITH NEW MOISTURE- RESISTANT GYP. BOARD THIS SIDE. A. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF RECORD AND STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. B. IF EXISTING EXTERIOR ENTRANCE THRESHOLD EXCEEDS REQUIRED AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF /2" (0MM), REMOVE AND REPLACE WITH ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD. RAISED THRESHOLDS AND FLOOR LEVEL CHANGES AT ACCESSIBLE DOORWAYS TO BE BEVELED WITH A SLOPE NO GREATER THAN :2. C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE FIRE TREATED WOOD STUD BLOCKING, OR EQUIVALENT, TO SUPPORT ANY WALL ATTACHMENT AND/OR SIGNAGE. D. ALL DOORS TO PROVIDE 36 (95MM) MINIMUM CLEAR OPENING WHEN OPENED TO 90 DEGREE POSITION, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. E. VERIFY THAT ALL EXISTING DOORS, HARDWARE AND FRAMES MEET STARBUCKS AND/OR LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. F. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISHED FACE UNLESS SHOWN OR NOTED OTHERWISE. G. GC TO PROVIDE NEW STUD FURRING AND GWB AS REQUIRED. H. SEE DRAWING -A03 FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES. 20 GA 3-5/8" (86 MM) METAL STUDS 6" (406 MM) O.C. WITH 5/8" (6 MM) MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM WALL BOARD ON BOTH SIDES TO SPECIFIED HEIGHT. DRYWALL 2" (305 MM) O.C. 6 NEW PARTITION WALL TO STRUCTURE (GYPSUM BOARD ON BOTH SIDES) 20 GA 3-5/8" (86 MM) METAL STUDS 6" (406MM) O.C. WITH 5/8" (6 MM) TYPE "X" GWB ON BOTH SIDES TO STRUCTURE ABOVE. DRYWALL 2" (305 MM) O.C. 7 SEE DRAWING -A0. 7 /4". GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS IN THE FIELD AND COORDINATE AS NECESSARY WITH ARCHITECT OF RECORD. 4 04A SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA 4 DN 7' - 6 /4" 2' - 8 /2" 3' - 5 3/4" VIF 04B 04C ALIGN 4 D 0086 SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA 3' - 7" 3' - 0". 2' - 5 /4" 2' - 0" 4' - 4 /2" WORKROOM 05A 3 BACKBAR ' - 2 3/4" 7 3' - 2 /4" 3' - 0" 5' - /4" 2' - " VIF INTERIOR WALL LEGEND SYMBOL LEGEND NEW FULL HEIGHT WALL NEW PARTIAL HEIGHT WALL EXISTING WALL EXISTING COLUMN DATUM POINT ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com I ON 4 ALIGN 7 9' - 8" VIF ALIGN ALIGN STARBUCKS 05 CAFE 30' - 8 /2" VIF 3 9' - 8" VIF RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES SB / GC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O E T I H C F A R ' - 4 /4" SB / FC GC / GC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR O E STAT G R E E C T LT S I D R E 22' - 2 3/4" 3' - 8 /4" 7' - 3" 3' - 8 /4" 4' - 8 3/4" 3' - 8 /4" LC / GC FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR 0/4/207 2:52:50 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt FLOOR PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" 2' - 7 3/4" ALIGN NOT IN SCOPE ALIGN 2' - 7 3/4" LC / LC FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: INTERIOR FLOOR PLAN & DOOR SCHEDULE Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A6

311 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES PENETRATION PLAN NOTES ELECTRICAL STUB-UP PENETRATION. REFER TO ELECTRICAL PLAN FOR INDIVIDUAL STUB-UP SPECIFICATIONS. PLUMBING STUB-UP PENETRATION. REFER TO PLUMBING PLAN FOR INDIVIDUAL STUB-UP SPECIFICATIONS. FLOOR SINK LOCATION. REFER TO CUT SHEETS FOR COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS AND CUTOUT REQUIREMENTS. MOP SINK DRAIN. REFER TO PLUMBING PLAN FOR DRAIN SPECIFICATIONS. NOT USED. FLOOR PENETRATION FOR LOUNGE SEATING ELECTRICAL SEE ELEC. DWGS. FOR FLOOR OUTLETS. FLOOR PENETRATION FOR COMMUNITY TABLE BASE ELECTRICAL. FLOOR PENETRATION FOR BANQUETTE SEATING ELECTRICAL. A. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF RECORD AND STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. B. ALL STUB-UP DIMENSIONS ARE RELATIVE TO FINISHED WALL LOCATIONS (SHOWN AS OUTLINES ON THIS PLAN). REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR WALL PLACEMENT. C. PENETRATIONS TO BE LOCATED FROM FINISHED FACE OF WALL, ON CENTERLINE OF WALL, OR AS REQUIRED PER CONDITIONS. D. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH SPECIFIC TRADES AND SITE CONDITIONS TO DETERMINE ACTUAL TRENCHING LAYOUT AS REQUIRED. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS IN THE FIELD AND COORDINATE AS NECESSARY WITH ARCHITECT OF RECORD. SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA 3' - 6 3/4" 7' - 5 3/4" 5' - 4 /2" SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA 4 DN 3 WORKROOM 05A 3 PENETRATION SYMBOL LEGEND FLOOR SINK 7' - 2 /4" 5' - 2" 8' - 4 /2" 7 7 8' - /4" 2' - 5 /4" 8' - 0" 6' - 2" 8' - 0" ' - 7 /4" 2' - 2" STARBUCKS 05 CAFE 8' - 5" BACKBAR 2' - 5 /2" 2 8' - 9 /4" 8 4 /2" 3' - 8 /2" 5" 5' - 2" 3 3 ' - 3/4" 0' - 3/4" 0' - 3 3/4" 4' - 2" 2' - 8 /4" FLOOR PENETRATION PLUMBING PENETRATION AREA ELECTRICAL PENETRATION AREA DATUM POINT ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE I ON THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O F E T I H C A R C T LD E STAT E T S R E NOT IN SCOPE G R E I 0/4/207 2:52:56 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt PENETRATION PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: PENETRATION PLAN Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A62

312 RICHARD.WEN9BO30DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES FURNITURE, FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT PLAN NOTES GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO SCHEDULE WITH LOCAL REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR TO CONDUCT INITIAL FOOD CASE START-UP AND TESTING. CONTACT STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER FOR LIST OF APPROVED START-UP CONTRACTORS. EACH HAND WASHING SINK TO HAVE SINGLE SERVICE TOWEL AND SOAP DISPENSER. ALL HAND SINKS TO HAVE COMBINATION FAUCET OR PREMIXING FAUCET. SEE RCP FOR LOCATION OF WALL MOUNTED SPEAKERS. PROPOSED LOCATION FOR NEW ELECTRICAL PANEL. (2) PROPOSED TRASH BINS TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER. FUTURE NITRO TAP SYSTEM. A. THE SPACE IS SERVED BY THE MUNICIPAL WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. B. EDIBLE FOOD PRODUCTS TO BE PHYSICALLY SEPARATED FROM STORAGE OF NON-EDIBLE OR TOXIC PRODUCTS. C. ALL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION WILL MEET NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION STANDARDS OR EQUIVALENT. D. EQUIPMENT UNITS SHALL CONTAIN NO EXPOSED THREADS, EMBELLISHMENTS OR OVERHANGING EDGES THAT SERVE AS PLACES FOR ACCUMULATION OF DUST, DIRT AND DEBRIS. E. FOR PLUMBING FIXTURES, REFER TO THE PLUMBING DESIGN PLAN. F. CONFIRM ALL NECESSARY CLEARANCES PER PRODUCT CUT SHEET REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL EQUIPMENT (E.G. ICE MACHINE). G. FOR LOCATION OF COUNTERTOP EQUIPMENT, REFER TO CASEWORK ELECTRICAL DETAILS. SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA E 0475 E 002 (4) E 0462 (4) E 046 A 0005 A 0076 E 4449 E 076 E ' - /4" F ' - 2 3/4" F 7879 (8) F 652 F 7327 DN (2) (2) F 8068 (4) F 2379 (4) F 763 (4) E 083 E 3620 E 30 E (2) E 2407 E 268 E 0947 E E 5 2 (2) A 0008 A 0000 (4) A 0029 A 004 (2) E 3682 E 586 E 3578 (2) E 0856 E 0856 (2) (2) BACKBAR E 032 E 0746 WORKROOM 05A (2) E 0808 E 0473 E 0396 (2) E 2694 E 3330 E 0858 (2) E 079 E 3584 (2) E 0855 E 009 E 0838 E 0222 (2) E 2508 E 0344 E 0267 (2) E E 4523 E 0527 E 7588 A 004 E 30 ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com I ON F 96 F 8428 (4) 4' - 4 /2" F 7879 (8) F 763 (4) STARBUCKS 05 CAFE (4) F 6520 F 2379 (4) (4) F 7326 (3) F 8645 (5) F F 8068 (6) F 8466 F 8468 (2) F 652 (3) F 7327 (3) RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES SB / GC SB / FC GC / GC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O F O I 0 E T I H C T LC A R D F 23 (2) LC / GC LC / LC FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE E STAT G R E I E T S R E 0/4/207 2:53:44 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt FURNITURE, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" NOT IN SCOPE N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FF AND E PLAN Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A63

313 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SPECIALTY EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - "E" FURNITURE SCHEDULE - "F" DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS COOLING FRIDGE UNDERCOUNTER DOOR - 27IN SB/ GC 685MM 0473 FRIDGE UNDERCOUNTER 2 DOOR - 48IN SB/ GC 220MM 083 FRIDGE REACH IN 2 DOOR - 5X35IN SB/ GC 295X890MM 268 FRIDGE UNDERCOUNTER DOOR WITH SB/ GC SHELF - 27IN 685MM 3620 FREEZER REACH IN DOOR LH - 27IN 685MM SB/ GC 3682 FREEZER REACH IN 2 DOOR - 54IN 370MM SB/ GC 7588 KEG DISPENSING SYSTEM - 27IN 685MM - WITH NONPLUMBED DRIP TRAY SB/ GC KIT INCLUDES UNDERCOUNTER FRIDGE, TAPS, TRAY, AND TUBING. FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION - DO NOT ORDER. EQUIPMENT BREWER SOFT HEAT WARMING STAND SB/ GC SINGLE 0746 BREWER DUAL SOFT HEAT SB/ GC 0808 GRINDER DITTING KR203 SB/ GC BREWER SERVER SOFT HEAT SB/ GC OVEN TURBOCHEF NEXT GENERATION SB/ GC BLENDER QUIET MODEL ON COUNTER SB/ GC ESPRESSO MACHINE MASTRENA SB/ GC 586 DISHWASHER HOT LOW STEAM SB/ GC FOOD CASE 6238 FOOD CASE - ZEPHYR - 66IN 675MM SB/ GC ICE 002 ICE - BIN B55 SB/ GC 0344 ICE - BIN DROP IN 90LB 40KG SB/ GC 0475 ICE - MACHINE ICE006HA AIR COOLED SIDE SB/ GC VENT 0527 ICE - BIN DROP IN 45LB 20KG SB/ GC OTHER 009 CUP DISPENSER TALL HOT VERTICAL SB/ GC 0396 CUP DISPENSER SHORT HOT VERTICAL SB/ GC CUP DISPENSER GRANDE VENTI COLD SB/ GC VERTICAL CUP DISPENSER GRANDE VENTI HOT SB/ GC VERTICAL 0858 CUP DISPENSER TALL COLD VERTICAL SB/ GC 0947 SOAP DISPENSER WALL MOUNTED LC/ GC 0977 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER FULL SIZE - LC/ GC TRANSLUCENT GRAY 5 SOAP DISPENSER SINK MOUNTED SB/ GC 30 2 CORNER GUARD IN 0MM - ANODIZED GC/ GC ALUMINUM 3330 MOBILE CUP DISPENSER CADDY SB/ GC 3584 CUP DISPENSER TRENTA COLD VERTICAL SB/ GC 4523 TANK MOUNTING BRACKET SINGLE SB/ GC FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION - DO NOT ORDER STORAGE 076 ROLLING PASTRY TRAY RACK SB/ GC 0222 WIRE SHELF GRID AT SINK SB/ GC WORKROOM SHELVING - 36IN 95MM SB/ GC WORKROOM SHELVING POSTS SB/ GC 0698 MOP RACK WITH 3 HOLDERS SB/ GC 0838 ROLLING WIRE CART FOR 3 COMP SINK SB/ GC DISHWARE DRYING RACK - 2IN 535MM SB/ GC 3834 BASE - 24X8IN 60X455MM SB/ GC 4449 WORKROOM SHELVING WITH TANK BRACKET - 30IN 760MM SB/ GC DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS CHAIR CHAIR - LOUNGE MODERN SLAT BACK - SB/ GC WALNUT AND OLIVE DRAB NATURAL WD0077 F CHAIR - STOOL COUNTER HEIGHT SB/ GC INDUSTRIAL WITH WOOD LEGS - BLACK AND WALNUT MT0028 WD CHAIR - CAFE S - WALNUT AND HOT ROLLED SB/ GC STEEL WD0077 MT CHAIR - STOOL 30IN 760MM S LOW BACK - SB/ GC WALNUT AND HOT ROLLED STEEL WD0077 MT BANQUETTE - BAJA - 69IN 755MM - DARK SB/ GC WARM BROWN AND OLIVE DRAB NATURAL WD000 F089 TABLE 96 4 TABLE - BASE FIXED T BASE CENTER - 42IN SB/ GC 065MM - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT TABLE - BASE FIXED T BASE END - 42IN SB/ GC 065MM - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT TABLE - OCCASIONAL X BASE SQUARE - 8IN SB/ GC 455MM - AGED DARK BROWN CM TABLE - BASE CAFE DOME ACCENT - 20X27IN SB/ GC 50X685MM - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT TABLE - BASE BAR HEIGHT DOME ACCENT - SB/ GC 20X40IN 50X05MM - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT TABLE - TOP ROUND - 24IN 60MM - WALNUT SB/ GC WD TABLE - TOP SQUARE - 24IN 60MM - WALNUT SB/ GC WD TABLE - COMMUNITY COUNTER HEIGHT SB/ GC ANGLE BASE - 8 SEAT - WITH POWER WALNUT WD TABLE - TOP ACCESSIBLE OBLONG - 24X48IN SB/ GC 60X220MM - WALNUT WD TABLE - BASE CAFE T LEG - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT00 SB/ GC DATA DEVICE SCHEDULE - "A" DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS AUDIO VISUAL 0005 MUSIC SYSTEM SB/ GC SPEAKER SURFACE MOUNTED SB/ GC SEE RCP FOR LOCATION 0076 AMPLIFIER - 4IN 355MM SB/ GC DATA 0000 PHONE LINE LC/ GC POINT OF SALE POS - REGISTER WITH COMPACT CASH LC/ GC DRAWER POS PRINTER LC/ GC POS BANK LC/ GC ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES NOTICE SB / GC SB / FC GC / GC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. LC / GC LC / LC FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T I H C T LC A R F D E R E E T STAT S G R E I 0/4/207 2:53:52 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FF AND E PLAN SCHEDULES Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A64

314 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES CASEWORK PLAN NOTES DO NOT CAULK TRASH RINGS TO COUNTERTOPS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CAULK WHERE POINT OF SALE COUNTERTOP MEETS FOOD CASE WITH HEALTH DEPARTMENT APPROVED CAULK. WHERE APPLICABLE, SECURELY ATTACH WARMING STATION CORBEL TO WALL FRAMING WITH MINIMUM /4 (6.35 mm) DIAMETER WOOD SCREWS OR LAG SCREWS INSTALLED TO A DEPTH OF 2 (50 mm) INTO FRAMING. WHERE CORBEL LOCATION WILL NOT ALLOW DIRECT FASTENING INTO WALL FRAMING, FIRE-TREATED WOOD BLOCKING MAY BE INSTALLED BEHIND WALL SHEATHING. BLOCKING IS TO SPAN BETWEEN STUDS AND MATCH STUD THICKNESS, FASTENED WITH LIGHT GAGE STEEL FRAMING CLIPS USING 8D NAILS FOR WOOD OR #2 SCREWS FOR STEEL STUDS. THE CORBEL MAY ALSO BE INSTALLED ON A FACE-MOUNTED 3/4 (9 mm) MDF BACKER PLATE. FASTEN THROUGH SHEATHING TO WALL FRAMING WITH THREE (3) /4 (6.35 mm) DIAMETER SCREWS OR LAG SCREWS INSTALLED TO A 2 (50 mm) DEPTH AT A VERTICAL SPACING TO MATCH CORBEL FASTENER HOLES. THE BACKER PLATE MUST SPAN OVER AND BE ATTACHED TO TWO (2) WALL STUDS AND EXTEND THE FULL 24 (60 mm) HEIGHT OF THE CORBEL. SEE DRAWING -A2 FOR SPECIFIED NANAWALL SYSTEM. COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM AS NEEDED. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTENT OF METAL TRIM LOCATIONS. CUSTOM STAND HERE COUNTERTOP PLACEMENT ALIGNS WITH WOOD WALL CLADDING - SEE SHEET -A8 FOR DESIGN INTENT. A. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER IMMEDIATELY IF A DISCREPANCY EXISTS BETWEEN CASEWORK SHOP DRAWINGS, SITE DIMENSIONS, CASEWORK PLAN OR ACTUAL CASEWORK FIXTURES. B. STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE CASEWORK DELIVERY DATE. STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER TO CONFIRM CASEWORK DELIVERY DATE WITH CASEWORK MANUFACTURER AT FOUR (4) WEEKS PRIOR AND THEN ONE () WEEK PRIOR TO SCHEDULED DATE OF DELIVERY. C. STARBUCKS CONTRACTS DIRECTLY WITH CASEWORK VENDOR TO SUPPLY CASEWORK LISTED IN CASEWORK SCHEDULE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. D. REFER TO CASEWORK INSTALLATION MANUAL PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. E. ALL CASEWORK BOX BASE UNITS SHALL BE SET ON /4" (6MM) NON-ABSORBENT PLASTIC SHIMS PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. F. SEE WALL FINISH PLAN FOR LOCATION, TAGGING, AND FINISH SCHEDULES OF APPLIED WALL TREATMENTS. G. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR CASEWORK SOFFIT LOCATIONS. H. REFER TO UPPER CABINET ATTACHMENT DESIGN DETAIL FOR INSTALLATION INFORMATION. I. POINT OF SALE AND HAND-OFF PLANE TO BE INSTALLED AT A MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 2'-0" (860MM) AFF. J. CASEWORK VENDOR TO PROVIDE ALL SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM AND ARCHITECT OF RECORD FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO MANUFACTURE. SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA SEE SHEET -A0 THIS AREA CASEWORK LEGEND INDICATES CHAIR RAIL C X5004 DN C X5008 C X50 C 4293 C 42 C 95 WORKROOM 05A C 2777 C 435 C 2025 INDICATES STAINLESS STEEL (SST) COUNTERTOP INDICATES SOLID SURFACE (SS) COUNTERTOP ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T 2' - 9" " VIF 0" ALIGN C X5004 C X A94 C X5007 TYP. C X5008 C X5004 C X A93 2 -A93 3" 3' - 5 /4" C X5004 ALIGN STARBUCKS 05 C X5005 C X C 2786 C C 2080 (2) C 7743 C 808 C 8060 C 8080 C X A95 CAFE 5 BACKBAR C 2080 C 2069 C 529 (2) C X5005 C 945 C 2096 C X503 C 7754 C 7763 C 55 (2) 6 -A95 C 2007 C 7755 C X5005 C 7767 C 826 C ' - 6" 3 -A96 C 429 C 2236 C 3374 C 3399 C 4089 C A96 4 3/4" VIF C X5005 C X505 C X504 C 7849 C 789 C 7847 C 7820 C 7893 C X A9 C X A92 C X CASEWORK VENDOR TO PROVIDE ALL SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM AND ARCHITECT OF RECORD FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO MANUFACTURE. RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H " RICHARD.WEN9BO30O F O I 0 E T I H C T LC A R D E R E E T STAT S G R E I NOT IN SCOPE 0/4/207 2:54:00 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt CASEWORK PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: CASEWORK PLAN Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A65

315 RICHARD.WEN9BO30DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT CASEWORK SCHEDULE - "C" CASEWORK FINISH SCHEDULE DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS CABINET 945 CABINET - 2IN 305MM SB/ FC 2007 CABINET - SINK OR ICE BIN - 24IN 60MM SB/ FC 2069 CABINET - BREW GRIND WITH PULLOUT SHELF - LH - SB/ FC 33IN 840MM CABINET - 5IN 380MM SB/ FC 2096 CABINET - WITH DRAWER - 5IN 380MM SB/ FC CABINET - WITH TRASH DROP - 5IN 380MM SB/ FC 4089 CABINET - ICE BIN - 6IN 405MM SB/ FC CABINET - POS - 30IN 760MM SB/ FC 7754 CABINET - ESPRESSO CUBBY - 8IN 455MM SB/ FC 7893 CABINET - TRASH SHROUD - 5IN 380MM SB/ FC 8060 CABINET - POS CUBBY - 5IN 380MM SB/ FC CAFE 2236 CONDIMENT CART SINGLE TOP SOLID SURFACE SB/ GC PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR CONDIMENT CART SINGLE BASE FRAME SB/ GC NOT PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR 3399 CONDIMENT CART SINGLE METAL TOP ASSEMBLY SB/ GC NOT PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR 429 CONDIMENT CART SINGLE FINISH PANELS WITH SB/ GC PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. LAMINATE BACK MERCH FEATURE CUBE FREESTANDING TALL - DARK WARM BROWN WD000 SB/ GC NOT PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR COUNTERTOP 95 COUNTERTOP - HAND SINK STAINLESS - 5IN 380MM SB/ FC 2025 COUNTERTOP - GRIND SCALE BACKBAR SOLID SB/ FC SURFACE - 5IN 380MM 2777 COUNTERTOP - BREW GRIND RINSE SINK SOLID SB/ FC SURFACE - LH - 90IN 2285MM 435 COUNTERTOP - CBS SOLID SURFACE - RH - 90IN SB/ FC 2285MM 4293 COUNTERTOP - WARMING SOLID SURFACE - 60IN SB/ FC 525MM 7755 COUNTERTOP - ESPRESSO WITH SINK AND ICE - LF - SB/ FC 4IN 2895MM X5009 CUSTOM STAND HERE COUNTERTOP - 0" W X 26" L SB/ GC PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. - VIF X502 CUSTOM COUNTERTOP - POS - 75IN 905MM SB/ FC X503 CUSTOM COUNTERTOP - ESPRESSO CAP - 4IN SB/ FC 2895MM X504 CUSTOM COUNTERTOP - NITRO - 44IN 20MM SB/ FC X505 CUSTOM COUNTERTOP - HANDOFF SQUARED SB/ FC DIEWALL 7760 DIEWALL - ESPRESSO - 4IN 2895MM SB/ FC 789 DIEWALL - NITRO - 44IN 20MM SB/ FC 7847 DIEWALL - FRONTBAR CORNER - LF SB/ FC 8080 DIEWALL - POS - 75IN 905MM SB/ FC OTHER 42 CORBEL SUPPORT - 24IN 60MM SB/ FC 55 2 ESPRESSO MACHINE PUMP MOUNT - 0X0IN SB/ FC 255X255MM 7767 ESPRESSO SNEEZE GUARD - 4IN 2895MM SB/ FC 826 ESPRESSO SHROUD - 4IN 2895MM SB/ FC X500 CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL GC/ GC AOR TO VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION IN COORDINATION WITH NANAWALL SYSTEM. X5002 CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL GC/ GC TO BE INSTALLED WITH WOOD INLAY PANEL ON BACKER BOARD X508. AOR TO VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION IN COORDINATION WITH NANAWALL SYSTEM. X5003 CUSTOM METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD GC/ GC AOR TO VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION IN COORDINATION WITH NANAWALL SYSTEM. X " X " METAL CORNER TRIM SB/ GC 6'-5" L - VERIFY LENGTHS IN FIELD. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. X " X " METAL CORNER TRIM SB/ GC 9'-6.75" L - VERIFY LENGTHS IN FIELD. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. X " X " UPPER METAL TRIM SB/ GC () AT 7'-2.5" L, () AT 4'-8.25" L, () AT 26'-8" L, () AT 3'-5" L - VERIFY LENGTH IN FIELD. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. X " FLAT BAR METAL TRIM SB/ GC () 20'-0" L, () 5'-7" L - VERIFY LENGTHS IN FIELD. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. X " X " METAL CORNER TRIM SB/ GC 7'-6.75" L - VERIFY LENGTHS IN FIELD. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. X500 CUSTOM SNACK/ MERCHANDISE CASE SB/ GC PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. X50 2 " X 2.25" BACKBAR METAL TRIM SB/ GC () 7'-0" L, () 26'-8.25" L - VERIFY LENGTHS IN FIELD. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. X508 CUSTOM WOOD ENTRY PANEL SB/ GC WOOD INLAY PANEL TO BE INSTALLED WITH METAL PANEL X5002. WOOD TO MATCH WD0073 MAD00. TO BE PLACED ON BACKER BOARD FOR GRAPHIC APPLICATION. SIZE: 33.25" W X 69.5" H - AOR TO VERIFY SIZE IN COORDINATION WITH NANAWALL SYSTEM AND METAL PANEL X5002. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR. PANEL 7763 PANEL - ESPRESSO - 4IN 2895MM SB/ FC 7820 PANEL - NITRO - 44IN 20MM SB/ FC 7849 PANEL - FRONTBAR CORNER - LF SB/ FC 808 PANEL - POS - 75IN 905MM SB/ FC LOCATION DESCRIPTION FINISH CODE COMMENTS #4 BRUSHED 6GA SST CABINETS - CABINET LEG METAL - STAINLESS STEEL - #4 BRUSHED 6GA SST BRUSHED COUNTERTOP - HAND SINK METAL - STAINLESS STEEL - #4 BRUSHED 6GA SST BRUSHED CP0007 COUNTERTOP - CONDIMENT CART COMPOSITE - BLACK RECYCLED CP0007 COUNTERTOPS - BACKBAR, SIDELINE COMPOSITE - BLACK RECYCLED CP0007 COUNTERTOPS - ESPRESSO SHROUD COMPOSITE - BLACK RECYCLED CP0007 COUNTERTOPS - FRONTBAR COMPOSITE - BLACK RECYCLED CP0007 MT00 CORNER, FLAT BAR AND UPPER TRIM METAL - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT00 LOWER FINISH PANEL - ENTRY METAL - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT00 STAND HERE BAR SUPPORT LEGS METAL - HOT ROLLED STEEL MT00 PL009 CABINETS - UNDERCOUNTER PLAM - MOTTLED BLACK PL009 WD0063 FINISH PANELS - CONDIMENT CART WOOD - DEEP BLACK - GLOSS WD0063 WD0073 COUNTERTOPS - STAND HERE BAR WOOD - WHITE OAK WD0073 WD0073 MAD00 FINISH PANELS - FRONTBAR WOOD - WHITE OAK - HORIZONTAL WD0073 MAD00 MICRO-BEVEL PLANK UPPER FINISH PANEL - ENTRY WOOD - WHITE OAK - HORIZONTAL MICRO-BEVEL PLANK WD0073 MAD00 RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES SB / GC SB / FC GC / GC LC / GC LC / LC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE I ON THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. CASEWORK VENDOR TO PROVIDE ALL SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM AND ARCHITECT OF RECORD FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO MANUFACTURE. H O E O F I 0 STAT E T I H C C T LA R E T D R E S G R E I 0/4/207 2:54:07 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: CASEWORK PLAN SCHEDULES Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A66

316 RICHARD.WEN9BO30DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE - "L" DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. BULB COMMENTS LAMP LED PAR LM 2700K SPOT - BLACK SB/ GC RECESSED CAN CAN - RECESSED HOUSING LED - 5IN 25MM - SB/ GC 600LM NEW CEILING CAN - RECESSED TRIM BAFFLE - 5IN 25MM - SB/ GC BLACK CAN - RECESSED TRIM WALL WASH - 5IN SB/ GC 25MM - BLACK CAN - RECESSED HOUSING LED - 5IN 25MM - SB/ GC 900LM NEW CEILING CAN - RECESSED HOUSING FOR LED TRIM - SB/ GC 4IN 00MM - NEW CEILING CAN - RECESSED TRIM ADJUSTABLE WITH LED ENGINE - 4IN 00MM - BLACK - 600LM SPOT SB/ GC INTEGRATED LED STRIP 325 TASK LIGHT INTEGRATED LED - VARIABLE LENGTH - WHITE TRACK TRACK - WITH CONNECTORS - 8FT 244CM - BLACK TRACK - FIXTURE OPEN FLARED - 3.5IN 90MM - BLACK TRACK - WITH CONNECTORS - 6FT 83CM - BLACK SB/ GC (6) INTEGRAL LED W (0) AT 2'-0" L, () AT 0'-" L. JUMPER CORD REQUIRED WHEN CONNECTING MULTIPLE UNITS SB/ GC SB/ GC SB/ GC () LED PAR LM SPOT BLACK, OR EQUAL GC TO PROVIDE STEM/ UNISTRUT FOR TRACK MOUNTING. GC TO PROVIDE STEM/ UNISTRUT FOR TRACK MOUNTING. GC TO PROVIDE STEM/ UNISTRUT FOR TRACK MOUNTING. X700 3 UNISTRUT CHANNEL FOR TRACK MOUNTING GC/ GC 7'-4 /2" L - VIF. GC TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL. X UNISTRUT CHANNEL FOR TRACK MOUNTING GC/ GC 4'-0 /2" L - VIF. GC TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL. TROFFER TROFFER - LED RECESSED - 24X24IN 600X600MM - WHITE LM SB/ GC INTEGRATED LED 5 L 325 () CEILING TREATMENT SCHEDULE - "U" DESIGN ID AREA DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS OTHER SF ACT - WHITE - 2X2FT 6X6CM GC / GC 2 Scale : SHEET NOTES ADJUST FOCUS OF ALL TRACK LIGHTING AND RECESSED DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING TO FULLY ILLUMINATE MENU BOARDS, MERCHANDISE BAYS, AND ARTWORK. CEILING GRID INSTALLATION START POINT WHERE INDICATED. LIGHT FIXTURES IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE TO BE CENTERED IN TILE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. AOR TO VERIFY LOCATIONS OF EXISTING DUCT WORK AND SPRINKLER PIPES. LED STRIP LIGHTING LOCATED UNDER FRONTBAR COUNTERTOP OVERHANG. SEE SHEET -A64 FOR SCHEDULE. NEW SOFFIT PAINT FINISH TO BE SPECIFIED BY AOR IN COORDINATION WITH ADJACENT TENANT. 7 2' - 0" 2' - 0" -A93 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" " /2" = '-0" SEE SHEET -A THIS AREA PAINT SCHEDULE COLOR CODE DESCRIPTION LRV RESP. COMMENTS P534-ES SW - BLACK FOX; NCS/AKZO NOBEL - FOREST 8 GC/ GC SW7020, USE PRIMER CP-; NCS - S BLACK 7502-Y; AKZO NOBEL - 30YY 0/038 P560-SG SW - ROYCROFT PEWTER; NCS/AKZO NOBEL - GC/ GC SW2848, USE PRIMER CP-; NCS - S GREAT GREY 500-B0G; AKZO NOBEL - 50BG BACKBAR 4/036 P58-ES SW - REPOSE GRAY; NCS/AKZO NOBEL - 60 GC/ GC SW705, USE PRIMER CP-; NCS - S DESIGNER GREY 502-Y; AKZO NOBEL - 50YY 63/04 LED STRIP LIGHTING LOCATION - PLAN REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES A. IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE, GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SEMI-RECESSED SPRINKLER HEADS WITH POLISHED CHROME ESCUTCHEONS CENTERED IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE. IF PENDANT HEADS ARE REQUIRED IN GYPSUM SOFFIT OVER FRONTBAR, CONCEAL SUPPLY PIPING WITHIN SOFFIT. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SPRINKLER LAYOUT TO ARCHITECT OF RECORD FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. B. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND LOCATE SPRINKLERS PER LOCAL CODES. CONTACT ARCHITECT OF RECORD AND STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER IF DESIGN INTENT IS AFFECTED. C. WHERE ACOUSTICAL CEILING MEETS WALL, PROVIDE ANGLE WALL MOLDING FOR REVEAL. MATCH CEILING GRID COLOR WHEN APPLICABLE. D. LEAVE (0) ADDITIONAL RETAIL CEILING TILES, TO MATCH RETAIL CEILING PAINT COLOR, ABOVE THE WORKROOM CEILING FOR FUTURE USE BY LICENSEE. E. PROVIDE GROMMET AT ALL CEILING PENETRATIONS FOR FIXTURES OR SUPPORTS. F. HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SHOWN FOR DESIGN INTENT ONLY. ACTUAL DIFFUSER SIZES AND LOCATIONS ARE NOT TO INTERFERE WITH PLACEMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES AS SHOWN. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF RECORD AND STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER OF ANY CONFLICTS. G. DIFFUSERS AND RETURNS IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE IN RETAIL AREA TO BE CENTERED IN TILE, PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT CEILING, TYPICAL. H. PAINT ALL EXPOSED HVAC DUCTS, HVAC DIFFUSERS, RECESSED SPEAKERS, LIGHT TRIM RINGS, PIPING, CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOXES THE SAME COLOR AS SPECIFIED ON SURROUNDING CEILING OR SOFFIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TYPICAL THROUGHOUT RETAIL AREA OF STORE. J. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. K. SEE ELEC. DRAWING FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTS/SIGNS AS REQUIRED BY CODE. FIXTURES TO BE SUPPLIED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. LD LD 7' - 0" AFF NEW GYP. SOFFIT C X5007 C X A 007 C X5004 L 5058 (3) L 2955 (3) L 456 L 5058 (3) L 2955 (3) L 456 7' - 0" AFF NEW GYP. SOFFIT L X A LINEAR DIFFUSER, SEE SHEET -A. L X7002 SEE SHEET -A THIS AREA L 5058 L 2955 (2) L 456 (2) L X700 L X700 L 456 L 2955 L 5058 (3) (3) L 5058 L 2955 (2) L 456 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (3) L 456 L 2955 L 5058 L 456 L 2955 L 5058 L 456 L 2955 L L X700 C X5008 L X700 L X700 C X5006 WD0073 C X5008 C X5004 EXISTING EXPOSED CONCRETE FINISH 29' - 5" AFF B.O. EXISTING DECK 4 C X5005 (6) (6) (5) (5) L 6227 (5) L 5077 L 5079 L 2947 L 456 L 2955 (2) L 456 (2) L 2955 C X5006 CAFE (6) (6) 3 U 057 P560-SG BACKBAR WD0073 L 2947 L 456 L 2955 L 456 L 2955 P560-SG L 5058 L 5058 L ' - 0" AFF NEW ACT CEILING 0' - 3" AFF NEW GYP. SOFFIT L 5077 (3) L 2907 (4) L 2907 C X5006 L X7002 C X5004 C X5005 C X5006 L 5079 (3)? L 340 (4) C X5005 C X5005 L 340 C X5005 A L X700 P58-ES L X700 L 374 L 3827 STARBUCKS 05 (2) (2) L X700 (2) (2) L X700 WORKROOM 05A 0' - 3" AFF NEW GYP. SOFFIT L 2947 L 5058 L 456 (2) (2) L 456 L 2955 (2) (2) L 2955 L 456 L 2955 L X700 L X700 (2) (2) P560-SG C X5005 L X700 7? 0' - 3" AFF P534-ES NEW GYP. SOFFIT 6' - " NEW GYP. SOFFIT 6' - " NEW GYP. SOFFIT SB / GC SB / FC GC / GC LC / GC LC / LC L. BALLAST BOXES, TRANSFORMERS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND WIRING FOR ALL LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE INSTALLED HIDDEN FROM VIEW. RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE I ON THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O E O F I 0 STAT E T G R E C T LI H I C A R E T S D R E 0/4/207 2:54:9 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" NOT IN SCOPE A N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A67

317 DATES AND REVISIONS RICHARD.WEN9BO30No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES LIGHTING DIMENSION PLAN NOTES LIGHT FIXTURE IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE TO BE CENTERED IN TILE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SUSPEND BOTTOM OF LIGHT TRACKS ABOVE SEATING AND ENGINE AREA AT 2'-0" AFF. SUSPEND BOTTOM OF LIGHT TRACKS ABOVE ARTWORK AT 4'-6" AFF. WALL MOUNTED SPEAKERS TO BE LOCATED AT 8'-0" AFF. A. HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SHOWN FOR DESIGN INTENT ONLY. ACTUAL DIFFUSER SIZES AND LOCATIONS ARE NOT TO INTERFERE WITH PLACEMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES AS SHOWN. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF RECORD AND STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER OF ANY CONFLICTS. B. DIFFUSERS AND RETURNS IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE TO BE CENTERED IN TILE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. SEE ELEC. DRAWING FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTS/SIGNS AS REQUIRED BY CODE. SEE SHEET -A THIS AREA SEE SHEET -A THIS AREA 2' - 7 3/4" 2' - 0 /4" 2' - 7 /2" 2' - /4" 7' - 2" 2 4 EQ EQ 2 7' - 2 /4" 2 5' - 7" 8' - 0" ' - 5 3/4" 4' - 9 /2" 0' - 3 /2" 2 ' - 6" 4' - 8 /4" CAFE 4' - 0" BACKBAR 7' - 7 /4" 7' - 7 /4" 7' - 7 /4" 5' - " 4' - 4" EQ STARBUCKS 05 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 5' - 5 3/4" 5' - 0" 8' - 0" 4' - 0" 2 2 5' - 0" WORKROOM 05A 8' - 0" 4' - 0" EQ 2 4' - 0" 4' - 0" ' - 6 3/4" 3' - 5 /2" VIF 4' - 8" 9' - 4 /4" 0' - 5 /2" 2' - 6" 4' - " 2' - " ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C NOTICE I ON ONS T RUC T THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com E T I H C A R 2' - 6" 3 3 ' - " EQ 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" EQ ' - 5 /4" F O E STAT E C T LT S I D R E G R E 2' - 5" 6' - 7 /4" NOT IN SCOPE 0/4/207 2:54:5 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt LIGHTING DIMENSION PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: LIGHTING DIMENSION PLAN Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A68

318 DATES AND REVISIONS RICHARD.WEN9BO30No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT FLOOR TREATMENT SCHEDULE - "T" WALL BASE SCHEDULE - "B" SHEET NOTES FLOOR FINISH PLAN NOTES DESIGN ID AREA DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS OTHER SF WALK OFF MAT - RECYCLED TIRE TILE - GC/ GC SEE SPEC SECTION 2483 CHARCOAL - 2X2IN 305X305MM TILE SF TILE - WARM DARK GREY - 2X24IN 305X60MM SB/ GC GROUT GR0008: MAPEI - 0 BLACK; LATICRETE - 45 RAVEN. GROUT SUPPLIED BY GC SF TILE - COARSE LIGHT GREY - 2X24IN 300X600MM SB/ GC GROUT GR0002: MAPEI - 93 WARM GREY; LATICRETE - 90 LIGHT PEWTER. GROUT SUPPLIED BY GC. DESIGN ID LENGTH DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS TILE BASE ' - 2" TILE BASE - WARM DARK GREY - 6X2IN 50X305MM SB/ GC GROUT GR0008: MAPEI - 0 BLACK; LATICRETE - 45 RAVEN; USE WITH OUTSIDE CORNER TILE 428. GROUT SUPPLIED BY GC ' - 3/4" TILE BASE - COARSE LIGHT GREY - 6X2IN 50X300MM SB/ GC GROUT GR0002: MAPEI - 93 WARM GREY; LATICRETE - 90 LIGHT PEWTER. GROUT SUPPLIED BY GC CABINET BASES TO BE SET AFTER FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION. TILE INSTALLATION START POINTS WHERE INDICATED. FLOOR SINK/FLOOR DRAIN LOCATION WHERE INDICATED. NOT USED. LOCATE WALK-OFF MATS AT EXTERIOR DOORS AS SHOWN. A. STARBUCKS TO SUPPLY RETAIL AREA AND WORKROOM FLOOR TILE AND TILE BASE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL MORTAR, ADHESIVE, AND GROUT. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO INSPECT ALL TILES AND REJECT DAMAGED OR SUBSTANDARD TILES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. B. ALL FLOORING AND BASE MATERIAL TO BE INSTALLED ACCORDING TO SPECIFICATIONS. C. ALIGN TILE TRANSITIONS ON WHOLE TILES WHERE POSSIBLE. CASEWORK BULLNOSE SANITARY COVED TILE BASE /4" (7MM) SHIM IF NEEDED FLOORING FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FINISH PANEL DIE WALL BULLNOSE SANITARY COVED TILE BASE FLOORING RUBBER CAULK TUB GYPSUM WALL BOARD FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC D. TILE BASE AND THRESHOLD GROUT JOINTS TO ALIGN WITH TILE FLOOR GROUT JOINTS. REMOVAL OF EXCESS GROUT WILL BE DONE WITH WATER. THE USE OF SULFURIC OR MURIATIC ACID IS PROHIBITED. IF THESE ACIDS ARE USED, THE INSTALLER WILL BE REQUIRED TO REMOVE THE ACID AND RESTORE THE GROUT AT THEIR EXPENSE. E. FOR CARPET INSTALLATION, REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. F. PROVIDE GROUT JOINT OF 3/6" (5MM). MAXIMUM DEVIATION OF THE TILE AND GROUT LINE OF /4" (6MM) PER 48" (220MM). G. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ACCURATE TILE QUANTITY TAKE-OFFS TO STARBUCKS PROJECT DEVELOPMENT MANAGER FOR ACCURATE ORDERING. 3 TOP SET TILE BASE AT CABINET TOP SET TILE BASE AT DIE WALL 4 Scale Scale : 3" = '-0" : 3" = '-0" 5 FRP AT MOP SINK Scale : 3" = '-0" FLOOR FINISH LEGEND FRP WALL FINISH A B INDICATES CAFE AND BACKBAR TILE BASE DID: 4280 INDICATES WORKROOM TILE BASE DID: 4854 BULLNOSE SANITARY COVED TILE BASE A DN 5 4' - 0" T ' - 0" A B A 3 -A7 Sim 3 STARBUCKS 05 B 6 -A7 T 4853 BACKBAR WORKROOM 05A A B Sim 4 -A7 A 3 3 B 5 -A7 STAINLESS STEEL CABINET LEG FLOORING MATERIAL 6 TOP SET TILE BASE AT SST LEG Scale : 3" = '-0" WOOD CLADDING BY CASEWORK MANUFACTURER AS LOOSE PLANK MATERIAL. GC TO INSTALL. MATERIAL THICKNESS VARIES. SEE CASEWORK FINISH SCHEDULE. /8" SUBSTRATE (MOISTURE RESISTANT) ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com CAFE HOT ROLLED STEEL MT00 WALL FRAMING TILE BASE NOTICE TYP. 7 -A7 T CLADDING AT BASE Scale : 3" = '-0" THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. A A A RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES H O E O F I 0 STAT E T I H C C T LA R E T D R E SB / GC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR G R E S I NOT IN SCOPE SB / FC FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR 0/4/207 2:55:02 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt FLOOR FINISH PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" GC / GC LC / GC LC / LC FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FLOOR FINISH PLAN Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A7

319 RICHARD.WEN9BO30DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES WALL FINISH PLAN NOTES WALL TREATMENT (AREA) SCHEDULE - "Q" DESIGN ID AREA DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS PLASTIC SF FRP - WHITE GC/ GC TILE SF TILE - WOOD GRAIN MATTE BLACK - 2X4IN 50X355MM SB/ GC GROUT GR0008: MAPEI - 0 BLACK; LATICRETE - 45 RAVEN. GROUT SUPPLIED BY GC. WALL COVERING SF VINYL - WALL COVERING - DARK WARM GREY SB/ GC WRINKLE TEXTURE WOOD X SF WOOD WALL CLADDING - WHITE OAK SB/ GC TO MATCH WD0073. PROVIDED BY CASEWORK VENDOR RESPONSIBILITY LEGEND - LICENSED STORES SB / GC SB / FC PAINT SCHEDULE COLOR CODE DESCRIPTION LRV RESP. COMMENTS P534-ES SW - BLACK FOX; NCS/AKZO NOBEL - FOREST 8 GC/ GC SW7020, USE PRIMER CP-; NCS - S BLACK 7502-Y; AKZO NOBEL - 30YY 0/038 P560-SG SW - ROYCROFT PEWTER; NCS/AKZO NOBEL - GREAT GREY P58-ES SW - REPOSE GRAY; NCS/AKZO NOBEL - DESIGNER GREY GC/ GC SW2848, USE PRIMER CP-; NCS - S 500-B0G; AKZO NOBEL - 50BG 4/ GC/ GC SW705, USE PRIMER CP-; NCS - S 502-Y; AKZO NOBEL - 50YY 63/04 FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY STARBUCKS / INSTALLED BY STARBUCKS FIXTURE CONTRACTOR INSTALL METAL CORNER GUARDS WHERE INDICATED. MOUNT AT 6" (50MM) AFF. AFFIX WITH #6 STAINLESS STEEL OVAL HEAD SCREWS, 3" (75MM) FROM ENDS AND 2" (305MM) ON CENTER. OFFSET SCREWS ON EITHER SIDE BY /2" (0MM) VERTICALLY. TO BE INSTALLED IN BACK OF HOUSE ONLY. SEE SPECIALTY EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL FRP FULL HEIGHT ON ALL WORKROOM WALLS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTENT OF BACK BAR WALL TILE. BACK BAR WALL TILE TO BE INSTALLED IN "RUNNING BOND" PATTERN. SEE CASEWORK PLAN FOR METAL CORNER TRIM LOCATIONS AND SCHEDULE. MOUNT AT 6" (50MM) AFF. AFFIX WITH #6 STAINLESS STEEL OVAL HEAD SCREWS, 3" (75MM) FROM ENDS AND 2" (305MM) ON CENTER. OFFSET SCREWS ON EITHER SIDE BY /2" (0MM) VERTICALLY. TO BE INSTALLED IN FRONT OF HOUSE ONLY. REFER TO CASEWORK PLAN FOR MORE INFORMATION. A. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH AND REPAIR ANY DAMAGE TO EXISTING WALLS TO A SMOOTH, PAINT READY SURFACE PRIOR TO PAINTING. B. CHANGE OF PAINT COLOR ALLOWED ONLY AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. D. WORKROOM TO BE FINISHED PER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. E. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR PAINT COLORS AND GRAPHICS LOCATIONS. F. REFER TO CASEWORK FINISH SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. G. ALL WOOD AND METAL SURFACES SHALL BE PAINTED SEMIGLOSS, OR EQUAL, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. GC / GC FURNISHED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR 6 WALL BLOCKING TO BE PROVIDED BY GC. LC / GC LC / LC FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BY LICENSEE / INSTALLED BY LICENSEE WALL TREATMENT LEGEND A INDICATES BACKBAR WALL TILE DID: 8298 EQ EQ B INDICATES FULL HEIGHT FRP /2 OFFSET (BRICK) C INDICATES WALL COVERING DID: 44 D E INDICATES WOOD WALL CLADDING DID: X940 INDICATES WALL PAINT P58-ES DN B 2 -A A72 WORKROOM 05A 3 -A A72 2 BACKBAR WALL TILE PATTERN - /2 OFFSET Scale : /2" = '-0" E 2 -A8 -A84 D D A A D -A83 A STARBUCKS 05 CAFE 5 6 BACKBAR -A85 2 A B 3 4 -A8 A D 3 TILE BACKER BOARD AT TILE AND BACKSPLASH WALL TILE SEALANT SOLID SURFACE BACKSPLASH OPEN AREA BEHIND SOLID SURFACE WALL TILE ABOVE SS BACKSPLASH Scale : 3" = '-0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE -A82 D D D THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. D D D D D WALL TILE E D C C C 3/8" (2MM) "L" SHAPED METAL TRIM I 0 H O E T I H C A R F SEALANT O STAT C T LE E T D R E NOT IN SCOPE TILE BACKER BOARD AT TILE AND BACKSPLASH G R E S I STAINLESS STEEL BACKSPLASH (WHERE OCCURS) 0/4/207 2:55:2 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt WALL FINISH PLAN Scale : /4" = '-0" 4 WALL TILE ABOVE SST BACKSPLASH Scale : 3" = '-0" N 0 2' 4' 8' Scale: /4" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: WALL FINISH PLAN Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A72

320 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES APPLY FRP TO WALL AT UNDERCOUNTER OPENINGS. A. REFER TO ARTWORK PROVIDER'S INSTRUCTIONS SHIPPED WITH ARTWORK FOR INSTALLATION AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS. B. CHANGE OF PAINT COLOR ALLOWED ONLY AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. D. FOR PAINT AND WALL TREATMENT SCHEDULES, REFER TO WALL FINISH PLAN. B.O. STEEL DECK 29' - 5" EXPOSED DUCT AND DIFFUSER, SEE MEP DWGS. FOR SIZING AND LOCATION. COORD. WITH ELEC. TO MISS LIGHTING SUPPORTS. LIGHT GAGE METAL BRACING AS NECESSARY EXPOSED DUCT AND DIFFUSER, SEE MEP DWGS. FOR SIZING AND LOCATION. COORD. WITH ELEC. TO MISS LIGHTING SUPPORTS. P58-ES P58-ES ENGINEERS RICHARD.WEN9BO30ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T P58-ES P58-ES P58-ES B.O. EXISTING CEILING 6' - " C X5007 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com Q 8298 EQ EQ Q X940 C X50 C X5006 C X5005 EQ EQ C X5006 8' - 0" B.O. SOFFIT 0' - 3" 5' - 7" HORN STROBE ALARM DEVICE 8' - 0" NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 0' - 3" 0' - 0" C X5005 0' - 0" 2' - 0" C X5007 2' - 0" I 0 H O E T I H C A R F 7' - 0" C X5009 POWER RECEPTACLE O E STAT E T C T LS I D R E G R E 0/4/207 2:55:20 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt B 4280 B 4280 Interior st Floor 0" SIDE BAR/ ENTRY ELEVATION - EAST STREET FACING ELEVATION - WEST 2 Scale Scale : 3/8" = '-0" 6" : 3/8" = '-0" C X5004 B 4280 C X ' 4' 6' Scale: 3/8" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A8

321 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES 2 CUSTOM STAND HERE COUNTERTOP LOCATION ALIGNS WITH WOOD WALL CLADDING. SEE STOREFRONT ELEVATION ON SHEET I-200 FOR GRAPHIC LOCATION. A. REFER TO ARTWORK PROVIDER'S INSTRUCTIONS SHIPPED WITH ARTWORK FOR INSTALLATION AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS. B. CHANGE OF PAINT COLOR ALLOWED ONLY AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. D. FOR PAINT AND WALL TREATMENT SCHEDULES, REFER TO WALL FINISH PLAN. B.O. STEEL DECK 29' - 5" EXPOSED DUCT AND DIFFUSER, SEE MEP DWGS. FOR SIZING AND LOCATION. COORD. WITH ELEC. TO MISS LIGHTING SUPPORTS. P58-ES ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T P58-ES P534-ES Q X940 EQ 20' - 0" TYP. C X5007 Q X940 6' - 4" EQ GRAPHIC ' - 4 3/4" VIF 0" LD 0" B.O. EXISTING CEILING 6' - " RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com RICHARD0/4/207 2:56:0 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt.WEN98' - 0" BO30GRAPHICS AND ARTWORK SCHEDULE - "G" DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS GRAPHICS - ARTWORK X00 CUSTOM ARTWORK SB/ GC SBX_SuperGraphicLC_k_TB.jpg. 70% BLACK INK PRINTED ON WD0073 MAD00 WALL PANEL. ARTWORK DIMENSIONS 2'-7.75" W X 3'-6.5" H. GRAPHICS VENDOR TO COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM. X002 CUSTOM FRAMED ART SB/ GC SBXART_745 - FRAME WITHOUT MAT - ART SIZE 2'-" W X 4'-0" H - NO MAT BOARDER - OVERALL SIZE 3'-3" W X 4'-4" H - PAPER - FRAME FINISH: WD0077 WALNUT - /4" SPACER. X003 CUSTOM FRAMED ART SB/ GC SBXART_75 - FRAME WITHOUT MAT - ART SIZE 2'-" W X 4'-0" H - NO MAT BOARDER - OVERALL SIZE 3'-3" W X 4'-4" H - PAPER - FRAME FINISH: WD0077 WALNUT - /4" SPACER X004 CUSTOM FRAMED ART SB/ GC SBXART_750 - FRAME WITHOUT MAT - ART SIZE 2'-" W X 4'-0" H - NO MAT BOARDER - OVERALL SIZE 3'-3" W X 4'-4" H - PAPER - FRAME FINISH: WD0077 WALNUT - /4" SPACER X005 CUSTOM LINE ART_779 BOTANICAL SB/ GC WHITE INK GRAPHIC PRINTED ON WALL COVERING DID: 44 (APPROX. 32 SF). ARTWORK DIMENSIONS: 6'-4" W X 0'-2" H. GRAPHICS - INTERIOR MENU MENU BOARD - FRONT PANEL INSERT SB/ GC STYLE MENU BOARD - DAILY OFFERING SB/ GC CHALKBOARD FRONT PANEL RECTANGULAR MENU BOARD - UNIVERSAL MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR FRONT PANELS SB/ GC C X5003 B 4280 ELEVATION - SOUTH Scale : 3/8" = '-0" 4' - 8 /4" TYP. C X5006 C X5005 Q 44 CONDIMENT 9' - 6 3/4" C X5005 EQ EQ C X5005 5' - 8" Q X940 FIRE ALARM DEVICE, SEE ELEC. DWGS. Q 44 EQ C X5006 7' - 2 /2" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" EQ C X5005 9' - 6 3/4" 0' - 2" 2' - 8" G X002 B 4280 G X003 G X004 Q X940 Q 44 G X005 LINEART TO BE PRINTED IN WHITE INK, BLACK LINES ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. GRAPHIC C X5004 POWER RECEPTACLE, SEE ELEC. DWGS. ' - 6" 5' - 2 /2" C X5007 Q X940 C X5009 ALIGN B 4280 ALIGN TYP. 4' - 6" 6" 5' - 7" Interior st Floor 0" 0 2' 4' 6' Scale: 3/8" = '-0" NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O E O F I 0 STAT GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: G R E I E T S INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A82 E T I H C A R D R E C T L

322 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES A. REFER TO ARTWORK PROVIDER'S INSTRUCTIONS SHIPPED WITH ARTWORK FOR INSTALLATION AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS. B. CHANGE OF PAINT COLOR ALLOWED ONLY AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. D. FOR PAINT AND WALL TREATMENT SCHEDULES, REFER TO WALL FINISH PLAN. B.O. STEEL DECK 29' - 5" P58-ES P58-ES P58-ES ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T LD EXPOSED DUCT AND DIFFUSER, SEE MEP DWGS. FOR SIZING AND LOCATION. COORD. WITH ELEC. TO MISS LIGHTING SUPPORTS. P534-ES P58-ES B.O. EXISTING CEILING 6' - " RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com C X5004 Q X940 TYP. C X ' - 8" Q X940 NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. C X5005 C X5005 2' - 0" I 0 H 2' - 0" O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O F E T I H C A R C T LD E STAT E T S R E 5' - 0" C X5003 G R E I 0/4/207 2:56:9 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt FRONTBAR ELEVATION - NORTH Scale : 3/8" = '-0" B 4280 X500 FOODCASE POS ESPRESSO NITRO B 4280 Interior st Floor 0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A83

323 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES A. REFER TO ARTWORK PROVIDER'S INSTRUCTIONS SHIPPED WITH ARTWORK FOR INSTALLATION AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS. B. CHANGE OF PAINT COLOR ALLOWED ONLY AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. D. FOR PAINT AND WALL TREATMENT SCHEDULES, REFER TO WALL FINISH PLAN.. B.O. STEEL DECK 29' - 5" P58-ES P58-ES P58-ES EXPOSED DUCT AND DIFFUSER, SEE MEP DWGS. FOR SIZING AND LOCATION. COORD. WITH ELEC. TO MISS LIGHTING SUPPORTS. ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T Q X940 Q X940 B.O. EXISTING CEILING 6' - " RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com C X5006 8' - 0" NOTICE C X5004 C X5004 2' - 0" THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. C X5008 C X5008 I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T I C T LH C A R F D R E E STAT E T B 4280 B 4280 Interior st Floor 0" G R E S I 0/4/207 2:56:26 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt ELEVATION - EAST Scale : 3/8" = '-0" GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A84

324 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT 26' - 8 /4" C X5006 -A93 C X50 2 -A72 2' - 0" G 2837 G 2837 G 2837 G 2837 G 2838 G 2838 G 2839 G 2839 G 2839 G 2839 G 2839 G 2839 VIF 0' - 3 /4" Q 8298 C X50 2 B.O. SOFFIT 0' - 3" SHEET NOTES APPLY FRP TO WALL AT UNDERCOUNTER OPENINGS. BACK BAR WALL TILE TO BE INSTALLED IN "RUNNING BOND" PATTERN. SEE DETAIL 5 FOR SHELF FOR WATER HEATER AND RO TANK. WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT NOT SHOWN IN ACTUAL LOCATIONS. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND DIAGRAMS FOR PROPER EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION AND PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS. INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES A. REFER TO ARTWORK PROVIDER'S INSTRUCTIONS SHIPPED WITH ARTWORK FOR INSTALLATION AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS. B. CHANGE OF PAINT COLOR ALLOWED ONLY AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. D. FOR PAINT AND WALL TREATMENT SCHEDULES, REFER TO WALL FINISH PLAN. C X5008 8' - 0" 7' - 0" VIF 8' - 3 /4" GRAPHICS AND ARTWORK SCHEDULE - "G" B 4280 C X5006 C X5005 D 0086 BACKBAR ELEVATION - NORTH Scale : 3/8" = '-0" 2' - 0" WARMING ADD BREW OPEN BEYOND B 4280 P560-SG CBS C X5005 Q 8298 MOP Interior st Floor 0" C X5006 C X5008 DESIGN ID COUNT DESCRIPTION RESP. COMMENTS GRAPHICS - ARTWORK X00 CUSTOM ARTWORK SB/ GC SBX_SuperGraphicLC_k_TB.jpg. 70% BLACK INK PRINTED ON WD0073 MAD00 WALL PANEL. ARTWORK DIMENSIONS 2'-7.75" W X 3'-6.5" H. GRAPHICS VENDOR TO COORDINATE WITH STARBUCKS DM. X002 CUSTOM FRAMED ART SB/ GC SBXART_745 - FRAME WITHOUT MAT - ART SIZE 2'-" W X 4'-0" H - NO MAT BOARDER - OVERALL SIZE 3'-3" W X 4'-4" H - PAPER - FRAME FINISH: WD0077 WALNUT - /4" SPACER. X003 CUSTOM FRAMED ART SB/ GC SBXART_75 - FRAME WITHOUT MAT - ART SIZE 2'-" W X 4'-0" H - NO MAT BOARDER - OVERALL SIZE 3'-3" W X 4'-4" H - PAPER - FRAME FINISH: WD0077 WALNUT - /4" SPACER X004 CUSTOM FRAMED ART SB/ GC SBXART_750 - FRAME WITHOUT MAT - ART SIZE 2'-" W X 4'-0" H - NO MAT BOARDER - OVERALL SIZE 3'-3" W X 4'-4" H - PAPER - FRAME FINISH: WD0077 WALNUT - /4" SPACER X005 CUSTOM LINE ART_779 BOTANICAL SB/ GC WHITE INK GRAPHIC PRINTED ON WALL COVERING DID: 44 (APPROX. 32 SF). ARTWORK DIMENSIONS: 6'-4" W X 0'-2" H. GRAPHICS - INTERIOR MENU MENU BOARD - FRONT PANEL INSERT SB/ GC STYLE MENU BOARD - DAILY OFFERING SB/ GC CHALKBOARD FRONT PANEL RECTANGULAR MENU BOARD - UNIVERSAL MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR FRONT PANELS SB/ GC 2' - 0" 4 3/4" VIF 0' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 3" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T B NITRO ESPRESSO POS FOODCASE FRONTBAR ELEVATION - SOUTH Scale : 3/8" = '-0" Q 469 B 4280 B.O. ACT CEILING 2' - 0" RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE TELECOMMUNICATIONS PANEL, SEE MEP DWGS. Q 469? THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 3 4 I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30E T I H C T LO C A R F D R E 7' - 2" MIN. E STAT G R E I E T S 0/4/207 2:56:36 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt Scale : 3/8" = '-0" B 4854 Interior st Floor 0" 3 WORKROOM ELEVATION - NORTH WORKROOM ELEVATION - EAST 4 Scale : 3/8" = '-0" B 4854 GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A85

325 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT SHEET NOTES INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES 2 SEE DETAIL 5/-A85 FOR SHELF FOR WATER HEATER AND RO TANK. WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT NOT SHOWN IN ACTUAL LOCATIONS. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND DIAGRAMS FOR PROPER EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION AND PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS. A. REFER TO ARTWORK PROVIDER'S INSTRUCTIONS SHIPPED WITH ARTWORK FOR INSTALLATION AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS. B. CHANGE OF PAINT COLOR ALLOWED ONLY AT INSIDE CORNERS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. C. PAINT SUBSTITUTIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED. USE STARBUCKS NATIONAL SHERWIN-WILLIAMS ACCOUNT "COLOR CODE" WHEN ORDERING PAINTS. D. FOR PAINT AND WALL TREATMENT SCHEDULES, REFER TO WALL FINISH PLAN. Q 469 B.O. ACT CEILING 2' - 0" Q 469 P ELECTRICAL PANEL, SEE MEP DWGS. B 4854 Interior st Floor 0" WORKROOM ELEVATION - SOUTH WORKROOM ELEVATION - WEST 2 Scale Scale : 3/8" = '-0" : 3/8" = '-0" B 4854 ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. I 0 H O RICHARD.WEN9BO30O E T C T LI H C A R F D E R E E T STAT S G R E I 0/4/207 2:56:45 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A86

326 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT 7 -A9 3' - 2 /4" VIF 2' - 9 /4" 2 /2" DESIGN INTENT ONLY. VENDOR TO PROVIDE DETAILS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM FOR APPROVAL BEFORE FABRICATION. METAL INLAY PANEL MT00 C X500 MT00 RICHARD.WEN9BO300' - 2 3/4" 2 /2" METAL INLAY PANEL 0' - 8 /2" VIF 3' - 2 /4" 2' - 9 /4" 2 /2" 2" " 6 /2" 6" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS MANAGERS C I ON ONS T RUC T CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL - 3D VIEW Scale : 2 CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL X500 - ELEVATION CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL X500 - PLAN SECTION 3 Scale Scale : 3/4" = '-0" 3' - 2 /4" VIF 7 -A9 : 3/4" = '-0" RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com 2' - 9 /4" 2 /2" MT00 C X5002 C X508 WD0073 MAD00 WOOD INLAY PANEL X508 2 /2" 5' - 9 /2" WOOD INLAY PANEL X508 6' - 2 /2" VIF AOR TO COORDINATE ALL ENTRY COMPONENTS WITH THE FINAL NANAWALL SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCATION. 3' - 2 /4" 2' - 9 /4" 2 /2" /2" 4" 6" 4" " EXISTING LOBBY CEILING METAL ENTRY PANEL SUPPORT FRAME/ BLOCKING /2" WOOD/ METAL INLAY PANEL /2" BACKER BOARD NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. H O E O F I 0 STAT E T G R E I H C T LI C A R E T S D R E 0/4/207 2:56:53 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL X5002/ X508 - ELEVATION 4 CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL - 3D VIEW CUSTOM METAL ENTRY PANEL X PLAN SECTION 5 6 Scale Scale : Scale : 3/4" = '-0" : 3/4" = '-0" 7 Scale : 3" = '-0" WALL FRAMING ENTRY PANELS - DETAIL TYP. GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: DESIGN DETAILS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A9

327 9' - 0 3/4" VIF MT00 C X5003 AOR TO COORDINATE ALL ENTRY COMPONENTS WITH THE FINAL NANAWALL SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCATION. 9' - 8" VIF 9' - 3" 2 /2" 8' - 0 /4" 2 /2" 9' - 8" VIF 9' - 3" 2 /2" 4' - 2 /4" VIF 2 /2" DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT MANAGERS ENGINEERS I ON ONS T RUC T ARCHI TECTS C RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: DRAWING NO. -A92 C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt 0/4/207 2:57:00 PM GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DESIGN DETAILS CUSTOM METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD - 3D VIEW Scale 3 CUSTOM METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD - PLAN SECTION Scale 3/4" = '-0" 2 CUSTOM METAL ENTRY THRESHOLD - ELEVATION Scale 3/4" = '-0" NOTES:. METAL THRESHOLD ASSEMBLY TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF (3) 3/4" PLYWOOD BOARDS WRAPPED ON ALL SIDES WITH /8" METAL PANEL DESIGN INTENT ONLY. VENDOR TO PROVIDE DETAILS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM FOR APPROVAL BEFORE FABRICATION. Author Checker : : : I 0 T E H H I C O A R F D C T LO R E HA.OW09E E B3ENT STAT RICRDS I G R E

328 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT DID: 2839 MOUNTING HARDWARE WALL/ CEILING FRAMING WALL FRAMING WOOD WALL CLADDING WOOD WALL CLADDING GC TO PROVIDE BLOCKING AND FASTENERS PAINTED GYP. (SAME COLOR) "X" METAL TRIM "X" METAL TRIM " " RICHARD.WEN9BO30DESIGN INTENT ONLY. VENDOR TO PROVIDE DETAILS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM FOR APPROVAL BEFORE FABRICATION. MENU BOARD WOOD WALL CLADDING " WOOD WALL CLADDING " X50 METAL TRIM METAL TRIM AT UPPER WALL OPENING - TYP. METAL CORNER TRIM - TYP. 2 Scale Scale : 6" = '-0" : 6" = '-0" 7'-0" AFF PAINTED GYP. WD0073 MAD00 C X500 CP0007 CP0007 CP0007 CAFE SIDE 2' - 0" 5 -A93 3' - 5 /4" 3 /4" 2' - " 3 /4" 3' - 4 /4" 6" " 6 /4" 7" /4" /4" /4" SHELF SHELF SHELF 6" BASE TO RECEIVE TILE BASE ON TWO SIDES - SEE -A7 FOR LOCATIONS FOOD CASE SIDE 9 MENU BOARD MOUNTING Scale : /2" = '-0" 8 4" (TYP.) 0" " WOOD WALL CLADDING DID: X940 " FLAT BAR METAL TRIM DID: X5007 WALL COVERING DID:44 WALL FRAMING WOOD WALL CLADDING/ WALL COVERING TRANSITION Scale : 3" = '-0" COUNTERTOP ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com I ON 3 CUSTOM SNACK/ MERCHANDISE CASE - 3D VIEW CUSTOM SNACK/ MERCHANDISE CASE - ELEVATION 4 Scale Scale : : 3/4" = '-0" " 34" MAX. AFF 2 /2" NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. /2" MIN. COUNTERTOP SUBSTRATE 0/4/207 :0:20 PM C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt Scale : CAFE SIDE 3/4" = '-0" 2" 9" 2" ' - 0" 2" " 2' - 0 /2" ' - 2 /2" 6" " 7 /2" 8 /4" WALL SIDE 2' - /2" 3' - 5 /4" 3 /4" 2' - " 3 /4" ' - 4 /2" ' - 0" 9" LED STRIP LIGHTING DID: 325 SEE LIGHTING SCHEDULE ON SHEET -A67. ALUM. Z-CLIPS, TYP. 5 CUSTOM SNACK/ MERCHANDISE CASE - SECTION 6 CUSTOM SNACK/ MERCHANDISE CASE - PLAN COUNTERTOP OVERHANG DETAIL 7 Scale Scale : 3/4" = '-0" FINISH PANEL : 6" = '-0" VARIES METAL ANGLE, TYP. DIEWALL NOTE: ALL COMPONENTS FURNISHED BY OTHERS AND INSTALLED BY G.C. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. H O E O F I 0 STAT GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: G R E I E T S DESIGN DETAILS Author Checker DRAWING NO. -A93 E T I H C A R D R E C T L

329 EQ EQ 3' - 4 /2" /4" 0" 3' - 5 3/4" ALIGN F 96 F 23 6 /2" 4' - 3/4" C X5009 WD0073 F 96 4' - /2" MT00 F 96 2' - 9" VIF 2' - 9" VIF 4' - /2" F 96 4' - /2" F 23 4' - 3/4" 6 /2" DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT MANAGERS ENGINEERS I ON ONS T RUC T ARCHI TECTS C RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: DRAWING NO. -A94 C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt 0/4/207 :0:27 PM GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DESIGN DETAILS 2 3 STAND HERE BAR - 3D VIEW Scale STAND HERE BAR - ELEVATION Scale 3/4" = '-0" STAND HERE BAR - PLAN Scale 3/4" = '-0" Author Checker : : : DESIGN INTENT ONLY. VENDOR TO PROVIDE DETAILS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM FOR APPROVAL BEFORE FABRICATION. I 0 T E H H I C O A R F D C T LO R E HA.OW09E E B3ENT STAT RICRDS I G R E

330 6' - 3" CP0007 C X502 3' - 4" 3' - 2 3/4" /4" /4" 2 /2" ' - 5 /4" ' - " 3' - 4" TYP. 7 -A93 2' - 0" 2' - 3" 2' - 0" CP0007 C X503 9' - 6" 6" /4" 2 /2" 6" 7 -A93 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT MANAGERS ENGINEERS I ON ONS T RUC T ARCHI TECTS C RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: DRAWING NO. -A95 C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt 0/4/207 :0:35 PM GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DESIGN DETAILS DESIGN INTENT ONLY. VENDOR TO PROVIDE DETAILS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM FOR APPROVAL BEFORE FABRICATION. POS COUNTERTOP - 3D VIEW Scale Scale 2 POS COUNTERTOP - ELEVATION POS COUNTERTOP - PLAN 3 Scale " = '-0" 3/4" = '-0" 4 ESPRESSO CAP COUNTERTOP - 3D VIEW Scale Scale 5 ESPRESSO CAP COUNTERTOP - ELEVATION ESPRESSO CAP COUNTERTOP - PLAN 6 Scale " = '-0" 3/4" = '-0" Author Checker : : : : : : I 0 T E H H I C O A R F D C T LO R E HA.OW09E E B3ENT STAT RICRDS I G R E

331 3' - 8" CP0007 C X504 3' - 4" /4" 2 /2" 3' - 4" 7 -A93 ' - 7 /2" CP0007 C X505 3' - 4" 2 /2" /4" 2 /2" 3' - 4" TYP. 7 -A93 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT MANAGERS ENGINEERS I ON ONS T RUC T ARCHI TECTS C RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: DRAWING NO. -A96 C:\Revit Projects\ _Global Center for Health Innovation_DD_098207_hflick.rvt 0/4/207 :0:42 PM GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DESIGN DETAILS NITRO COUNTERTOP - 3D VIEW Scale Scale 2 NITRO COUNTERTOP - ELEVATION NITRO COUNTERTOP - PLAN 3 Scale " = '-0" 3/4" = '-0" 4 HANDOFF COUNTERTOP - 3D VIEW Scale Scale 5 HANDOFF COUNTERTOP - ELEVATION HANDOFF COUNTERTOP - PLAN 6 Scale " = '-0" 3/4" = '-0" Author Checker : : : : : : DESIGN INTENT ONLY. VENDOR TO PROVIDE DETAILS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO STARBUCKS DM FOR APPROVAL BEFORE FABRICATION. I 0 T E H H I C O A R F D C T LO R E HA.OW09E E B3ENT STAT RICRDS I G R E

332 GENERAL. COORDINATE WITH ALL DRAWINGS FOR INFORMATION RELATED TO STRUCTURAL WORK. ANY CHANGES TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURAL SYSTEM SHALL BE REDESIGNED ONLY BYRICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. ALL CHANGES MUST HAVE PRIOR AUTHORIZATION OF THE OWNER AND RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 2. ALL CONTRACTORS SHALL COORDINATE WITH ALL DRAWINGS WITHIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS RELATED TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, EXISTING SERVICES, AND THE SITE BEFORE BEGINNING WORK. 4. BUILDING CODE: 20 OHIO BUILDING CODE (OBC) 5. DESIGN LOADS: FLOOR LIVE LOAD PSF ROOF DEAD LOAD PSF ROOF LIVE LOAD PSF ROOF SNOW LOAD: GROUND SNOW LOAD... Pg=30.0 PSF SLOPED ROOF SNOW LOAD... Pf=23.0 PSF WIND DESIGN DATA: WIND LOADS: BASIC WIND SPEED (3-SECOND GUST)...90 MPH IMPORTANCE FACTOR: Iw....0 OCCUPANCY CATEGORY... CATEGORY II WIND EXPOSURE CATEGORY... B INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT, GCpi... ±0.8 M.W.F.R.S. (h 60) HORIZ. LOADS (WALLS) VERT. LOADS (ROOF) INTERIOR ZONE END ZONE INTERIOR ZONE END ZONE 8.5 PSF 2.8 PSF -0.7 PSF -5.4 PSF HORIZ. LOADS (PARAPET) WINDWARD LEEWARD a a 22.4 PSF -3.8 PSF COMPONENT AND CLADDING (h<60) ROOF NEG. ZONE -4.6 PSF -4.2 PSF -3.7 PSF -3.3 PSF -3.3 PSF WIND AREA: 0 SF 20 SF 50 SF 00 SF 200 SF 2 2 NEG. ZONE PSF -2.8 PSF -8.4 PSF -5.8 PSF -5.8 PSF NEG. ZONE PSF PSF -22. PSF -5.8 PSF -5.8 PSF POS. ALL ZONES +0 PSF +0 PSF +0 PSF +0 PSF +0 PSF ROOF WIND AREA: 20 SF NEG. ZONE PSF -4.3 PSF -3.6 PSF -3.6 PSF -2. PSF NEG. ZONE PSF -6.5 PSF -5. PSF -5. PSF -2. PSF POS. ZONES 4& PSF +3.0 PSF +2.4 PSF +2.4 PSF +0.9 PSF WALLS 0 SF 50 SF 00 SF 500 SF PARAPET WIND AREA: 0 SF 00 SF 500 SF 5 5 POS. INTERIOR ZONE +48 PSF +40 PSF +34 PSF 4 4 POS. CORNER ZONE +6 PSF +52 PSF +44 PSF NEG. INTERIOR ZONE -3 PSF -26 PSF -22 PSF 5 5 WALL NEG. CORNER ZONE -35 PSF -28 PSF -22 PSF PLUS AND MINUS SIGNS SIGNIFY PRESSURES ACTING TOWARD & AWAY FROM BUILDING SURFACES. COMPONENT AND CLADDING LOADS MAY BE INTERPOLATED BETWEEN THE WIND AREAS. SEE ABOVE NOTES FOR NET UPLIFT LOADS ON JOIST AND JOIST GIRDERS. (a) = 0'-3" - SEE DIAGRAMS ABOVE. SEISMIC DESIGN DATA: SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR... Ie=.25 OCCUPANCY CATEGORY... II Ss S SITE CLASS... D SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENTS... Sds=0.203 Sd=0.082 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY... B 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND THE FINAL CLEARANCE OF ANY TEMPORARY NEEDLING, UNDERPINNING, SHORING, OR BRACING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES. 7. CONSTRUCTION LOADS SHALL NOT EXCEED DESIGN LIVE LOADS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL DESIGN REQUIRED TO SUPPORT CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT USED IN CONSTRUCTING THIS PROJECT. SHORING AND RESHORING IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 8. IF THE FABRICATOR HAS BEEN AUTHORIZED TO USE THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS AS ERECTION DRAWINGS, THE FABRICATOR MUST REMOVE ALL TITLE BLOCKS, PROFESSIONAL SEALS AND ANY OTHER REFERENCES TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER FROM THAT ERECTION DRAWING. THE FABRICATOR'S NAME AND TITLE SHALL BE PLACED ON THE ERECTION DRAWINGS. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST ACI 38 & 350 CODE, STANDARDS AND ACI 30 "STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE", EXCEPT AS MODIFIED HEREIN. 2. SUBMIT LABORATORY TEST REPORTS FOR CONCRETE MATERIALS AND PROPOSED MIX DESIGN TESTS AND DATA. 3. MINIMUM ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE IN 28 DAYS SHALL BE: 3000 PSI - COLUMN AND WALL SPREAD FOOTINGS: MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT OF 470 LB/CUBIC YARD; WC PSI - INTERIOR SLAB: MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT OF 57 LB/CUBIC YARD; WC PSI - ALL OTHER CONCRETE MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT OF 564 LB/CUBIC YARD; WC REINFORCING BARS: A65 GRADE 60 KSI YIELD STRENGTH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WELDING OR TACK WELDING A65 BARS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. 5. REINFORCING BARS FOR WELDED APPLICATIONS SHALL CONFORM WITH A706, 60 KSI YIELD STRENGTH. 6. WELDED WIRE FABRIC: ASTM A85, FLAT SHEET. ROLLED WWF SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. 7. CALCIUM CHLORIDE SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED NOR SHALL ANY ADMIXTURE CONTAINING CALCIUM CHLORIDE BE PERMITTED. 8. ALL CONCRETE SHALL CONTAIN A WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE CONFORMING TO ASTM C494, TYPE A, F OR G. 9. ALL CONCRETE EXPOSED TO THE WEATHER OR IN A LOCATION VULNERABLE TO DEICERS SHALL CONTAIN AN AIR-ENTRAINED ADMIXTURE CONFORMING TO ASTM C260. THE AMOUNT OF ENTRAINED AIR SHALL BE 6% ± %. 0. CONCRETE SHALL BE DISCHARGED AT THE SITE WITHIN /2 HOURS AFTER WATER HAS BEEN ADDED TO THE CEMENT AND AGGREGATES. ADDITION OF WATER TO THE MIX AT THE PROJECT SITE WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. ALL WATER MUST BE ADDED AT THE BATCH PLANT. SLUMP MAY BE ADJUSTED ONLY THROUGH THE USE OF ADDITIONAL WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE OR HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE.. PRECAST CONCRETE CUBES OR SAND PLATE CHAIRS SHALL BE USED FOR THE SUPPORT OF REINFORCING ON GRADE. CONCRETE BLOCK OR CLAY MASONRY BRICK ARE NOT PERMITTED. 2. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO REVIEW BY RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC., AND SHALL BE LOCATED AND DETAILED AS SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS OR AS NOTED. A. FRAMED SLABS AND WALLS - LOCATE AT MIDSPAN. PROVIDE ONE CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL SHEAR KEY /2" DEEP x /3 THE DEPTH OF THE SLAB OR WALL. B. BEAMS - LOCATE AT MIDSPAN. PROVIDE TWO HORIZONTAL SHEAR KEYS /2" DEEP x /6 THE DEPTH OF THE MEMBER AT EACH MEMBER. 3. ALL WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL BE CHAIRED TO ITS PROPER HEIGHT AND MAINTAINED AT THE PROPER HEIGHT THROUGHOUT THE CONCRETE PLACING OPERATION. LIFTING OF WELDED WIRE FABRIC WITH A HOOK DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. 4. OPENINGS SHALL NOT BE PROVIDED IN FRAMED SLABS, BEAMS, COLUMNS, OR WALLS UNLESS SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, OR APPROVED IN WRITING PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE. CUTTING HOLES THROUGH BEAMS OR COLUMNS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. CUTTING HOLES LARGER THAN 0" SQUARE OR ROUND THROUGH SLABS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. 5. CHAMFER EXPOSED EDGES OF CONCRETE 3/4", UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 6. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS IN ALL SLABS ON GRADE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 7. TOP LAYER OF REINFORCING STEEL IN BEAMS, SLABS, WALLS AND FOOTINGS SHALL BE CONSIDERED TOP BARS REGARDLESS OF THICKNESS OF CONCRETE BELOW THE BARS. 8. ALL WALL FOOTING REINFORCING SHALL RUN CONTINUOUS THROUGH COLUMN FOOTINGS. 9. BEND ALL HORIZONTAL WALL AND BEAM BARS AROUND ADJACENT CORNERS AND LAP ACCORDING TO TABLE #. 20. BONDBREAKER MATERIAL SHALL BE 5 POUND FELT PAPER. a a a STRUCTURAL STEEL. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF AISC SPECIFICATIONS (ASD) AND CODES OF STANDARD PRACTICE, AWS D. (STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - STEEL), AND THE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 2. THE LOCATION, SIZE AND CONDITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, SERVICES AND OTHER RELEVANT ENGINEERING FEATURES SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR ERECTION TO DETERMINE CLEARANCES, DIMENSIONS AND FABRICATION OR ERECTION PROCEDURES. ADEQUATE BRACING AND TEMPORARY SUPPORTS FOR THE STABILITY OF ALL EXISTING RELEVANT FEATURES SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR. 3. STRUCTURAL STEEL: ASTM A36; SHAPES (EXCEPT WIDE FLANGE), PLATES, BARS, AND ROD ASTM A992, GRADE 50, WIDE FLANGE SHAPES ASTM A500, GRADE B, STEEL TUBING ASTM A53, TYPE E OR S, GRADE B, STEEL PIPE. 4. BOLTS: 3/4" DIAMETER MINIMUM, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ASTM A325, TYPE, FOR ALL BEAM AND COLUMN CONNECTIONS. CONNECTIONS DESIGNED AS BEARING TYPE, WITH THREADS INCLUDED IN THE SHEAR PLANE. ASTM F554 GRADE 36 FOR ALL ANCHOR RODS. 5. WELDING SHALL CONFORM WITH AWS E-70 ELECTRODES, MINIMUM. 6. PROVIDE ANGLE WALL ANCHORS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH PART 4, AISC MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, FOR BEAMS BEARING ON MASONRY WALLS. ANGLE ANCHORS SHALL BE WELDED TO BEAMS. 7. STEEL BEAMS SHALL BEAR A MINIMUM OF 8" ON MASONRY, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8. CONNECTIONS: WELD OR BOLT CONNECTIONS, AS INDICATED. A. CONNECTIONS NOT DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE AISC SPECIFICATIONS. B. WHERE THE REACTION VALUES OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, THE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO SUPPORT THE END REACTION DERIVED FROM THE ALLOWABLE UNIFORM LOAD TABLE IN PART 2, NINTH EDITION, OF THE AISC ASD MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION FOR THE GIVEN MEMBER SIZE, SPAN, AND YIELD STRENGTH. C. THE MINIMUM LENGTH OF CONNECTION ANGLES SHALL BE EQUAL TO ONE-HALF THE DEPTH OF THE MEMBER TO BE SUPPORTED D. ONE-SIDED CONNECTIONS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS. E. THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF BOLTS IN BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE 2. F. DO NOT FINAL WELD OR BOLT UNTIL MEMBERS ARE IN PROPER ALIGNMENT. 9. ANY MEMBER LOADS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE SERVICE LOADS. CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED AND DETAILED USING AISC ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN. A /3 STRESS INCREASE MAY NOT BE USED ON ANY MEMBER LOADS INDICATED. 0. MEMBER LOADS INDICATED +/- ARE MEMBERS THAT WILL ACT WITH EITHER TENSION OR COMPRESSION LOADS. DOUBLE ANGLES WITH LOADS INDICATED +/- SHALL BE DETAILED WITH INTERMITTENT FILLERS (STITCH FASTENERS OR WELDED FILLS) PER AISC SPECIFICATIONS.. NON-METALLIC, NON-SHRINK, NON-STAINING GROUT UNDER ALL COLUMN BASE PLATES AND BEAM BEARING PLATES SHALL CONSIST OF A PREMIXED PRODUCT COMPLYING WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF CRD-C62, ASTM C827, AND C09. LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING. ALL LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING AND CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED, FABRICATED, AND ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AISI "SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF COLD FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS" AND NAAMM ML/SFA 540, "LIGHTWEIGHT STEEL FRAMING SYSTEMS MANUAL." 2. ALL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SHALL BE FORMED FROM CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL, ASTM A653-94, WITH A YIELD STRENGTH OF 33 KSI FOR MEMBERS 8 GAGE AND LIGHTER, AND 50 KSI FOR MEMBERS 6 GAGE AND HEAVIER. 3. ALL LIGHT GAGE MEMBERS AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE ZINC COATED MEETING ASTM A ALL CONNECTIONS ARE TO BE SCREWED WITH A MINIMUM OF (4) #2-4 CADMIUM PLATED SCREWS OR EQUIVALENT WELDS. 5. DIAGONAL STRAP BRACING SHALL BE CONNECTED TO ALL CROSSING MEMBERS. 6. WELDING SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWS D.3-89, STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE, SHEET STEEL. 7. SEQUENCING OF WELDS SHALL BE SUCH TO AVOID DISTORTION OF MEMBERS. REPLACE ALL MEMBERS WHICH ARE BURNED THROUGH OR DISTORTED DURING WELDING OPERATIONS. 8. PROVIDE CLIP ANGLES OR OTHER ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 9. CLEAN AND TOUCH UP ALL WELDS WITH ZINC RICH PRIMER. DEFERRED STRUCTURAL SUBMITTALS. DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS FOR DEFERRED SUBMITTALS SHALL BE STAMPED BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF OHIO AND SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO SUBMISSION TO THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT FOR REVIEW. DEFERRED SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: -LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUILDING CODE SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE FOLLOWING: -CONCRETE -BOLTS IN CONCRETE -REINFORCING STEEL -STRUCTURAL WELDING -HIGH STRENGTH BOLTING -STRUCTURAL MASONRY -EXPANSION AND EPOXY ANCHORS -EXCAVATION AND FILLING DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS C ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE I ON THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 0/4/207 2:59:25 PM C:\Users\rhart\Documents\ Cleveland Medical Mart_rhart.rvt 2. DETERMINE SIZE AND LOCATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND MAKE PROVISIONS FOR BOLTS, SLEEVES, PADS, ETC., IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED DRAWINGS. THIS WORK SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE TRADES INVOLVED PRIOR TO ANY CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 22. PROVIDE 3" MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL BELOW GRADE. 24. REINFORCING BAR LAP SPLICES AND ANCHORAGE LENGTH SHALL CONFORM WITH "MINIMUM LAP SPLICE AND ANCHORAGE DIMENSION TABLE #" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. MINIMUM LAP SPLICE AND ANCHORAGE DIMENSION TABLE # Fy = GRADE 60, NON-COATED BARS 3000 PSI CONCRETE TOP BARS OTHER BARS BAR SIZE LAP ANCHORAGE BAR SIZE LAP ANCHORAGE #3 2" 6" #3 6" 3" #4 29" 22" #4 22" 7" #5 42" 32" #5 33" 26" #6 56" 43" #6 43" 34" #7 9" 69" #7 70" 53" #8 2" 87" #8 87" 66" #9 36" 04" #9 04" 80" 4000 PSI CONCRETE TOP BARS OTHER BARS BAR SIZE LAP ANCHORAGE BAR SIZE LAP ANCHORAGE #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 8" 25" 37" 48" 79" 4" 9" 29" 38" 60" #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 6" 20" 29" 38" 60" 2" 5" 2" 29" 47" #8 #9 96" 7" 75" 9" #8 #9 75" 9" 57" 69". WHEN LAPPING TWO DIFFERENT SIZE BARS, USE THE LAP DIMENSION OF THE SMALLER BAR OR THE ANCHORAGE DIMENSION OF THE LARGER BAR. USE WHICHEVER DIMENSIONIS LARGER. TYPICAL REINFORCING BAR CLEARANCE TABLE. LOCATION CLEARANCE CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH...3" BEAMS (LONGITUDINAL REINFORCING PARALLEL TO SPAN OF SLAB)...3" BEAMS (LONGITUDINAL REINFORCING PERPENDICULAR TO SPAN OF SLAB)...2" BEAM STIRRUPS... /2" COLUMNS AND PIERS (VERTICAL REINFORCING)...2" COLUMN TIES... /2" WALLS INTERIOR FACE NOT EXPOSED TO SLUDGE, LIQUIDS, ETC...." WALLS INTERIOR FACE EXPOSED TO SLUDGE, LIQUIDS, ETC....2" WALLS EXTERIOR FACE #5 AND SMALLER... /2" WALLS EXTERIOR FACE #6 AND LARGER...2" SLABS (INTERIOR INCLUDING STAIRS) NOT EXPOSED TO SLUDGE LIQUIDS, ETC..." SLABS INTERIOR EXPOSED TO SLUDGE, LIQUIDS, ETC...2" SLABS (EXTERIOR INCLUDING STAIRS)... /2" STRUCTURAL SLABS ON GRADE (BOTTOM REINFORCING)...2" SLABS ON GRADE (WELDED WIRE FABRIC).../3 SLAB THICKNESS FROM TOP OF SLAB GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANT FIT OUT GENERAL NOTES AND DETAILS BWE DET 8832 DRAWING NO. -S0

333 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT 24' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" SEE ARCH. C EXIST. SIDEWALK CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH. SAWCUT / DEMOLISH PORTION OF EXIST. CONC. WALL 8" SLAB w/ 2" o.c. E.W. SLOPE 6" o.c., EPOXY MIN. 4" INTO EXIST. CONC. W/ HILTI RE500 VESTIBULE SLAB SEE PLAN SEE ARCH FIN. FLR. EL. 0'-0" CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH. COORDINATE FACE OF CURB LOCATION w/ ARCH. EXIST. SLAB 3' - 6" 6" VOID FORM 6" o.c., EPOXY MIN. 4" INTO EXIST. CONC. W/ HILTI RE500 4" #5 CONT. SEE ARCH. FIN. FLR. EL. 0'-0" 0/4/207 2:59:33 PM C:\Users\rhart\Documents\ Cleveland Medical Mart_rhart.rvt D E F G 25' - 0" 25' - 0" 35' - 0" 35' - 0" FROST SLAB -S ADD (2) #5 x 4'-0" LONG, MID-SLAB 2 -S 2 -S VESTIBULE SLAB AND RAMP: 5" CONC. SLAB ON GRADE w/ 6 lb/cy MACROSYNTHETIC FIBER OVER 0 MIL VAPOR BARRIER OVER 4" COMPACTED SUBGRADE RAMP DN 3 -S CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH. 4 -S PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 3/6" = '-0" EXIST. SLAB PLAN NORTH FOLDING PARTITION SILL SEE ARCH. CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH. FOLDING PARTITION SILL SEE ARCH. C- ' - /2" C-2 C-2 C-2 22' - 9" COLUMN SCHEDULE MARK SIZE BASE PLATE ANCHOR RODS C- HSS6X4X/4 9"x3/4"x0'-0" (4) 3/4" ø C-2 HSS4X4X/4 9"x3/4"x0'-9" (4) 3/4" ø NOTE: ANCHOR IS HILTI HAS ROD W/ RE500 EPOXY, MIN. 4" EMBED. 2.5 C L ' - 0" VESTIBULE SLAB SEE PLAN SEE PLAN 4 /2" 4 /2" 6" o.c. #5 CONT. TOP AND BOT. FROST SLAB FND. WALL TYP. (3) SIDES SECTION -S SCALE: 3/4" = '-0" 3" 3" RAMP 3 RAMP SECTION -S SCALE: 3/4" = '-0" C L 5" 5" 3 /2" 3 /2" THICKEN EDGE ADJACENT TO STEPS SEE PLAN 4 /2" 4 /2" 3" 3" NOTE: SEE COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR PLATE SIZE AND ANCHORS. EXIST. FOUNDATION #4 6" o.c. EPOXY MIN. 4" INTO EXIST. SLAB W/ HILTI RE500 G F E 4 /2" 4 /2" 3" 3" TYP. /4 C- C-2 TYPICAL BASE PLATE DETAILS SCALE: /2" = '-0" ' - 0" EXIST. SLAB FIN. FLR. EL. 0'-0" VESTIBULE SLAB SEE PLAN 2 SECTION -S #4 CONT. NOSE VESTIBULE SLAB SEE PLAN SCALE: /2" = '-0" 4 SECTION -S #4 6" o.c. TYP., EPOXY MIN. 4" INTO EXIST. SLAB W/ HILTI RE500 NOTE: SEE ARCH. FOR RISE AND RUN DIMENSIONS SCALE: 3/4" = '-0" EXIST. SLAB #4 CONT. 6" o.c. EPOXY MIN. 4" INTO EXIST. CONC. W/ HILTI RE500 FIN. FLR. EL. 0'-0" ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS NOTICE DRAWING NO. -S C I ON ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN, SECTIONS AND DETAILS BWE DET 8832

334 F DATES AND REVISIONS ' - 0" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 3/6 L4X4 3/8"X6 /2"X'-0" PL. HSS BEAM TYP. SEE PLAN TYP. 3/6 L4X4 CUT TO LENGTH 3/8"X6 /2"X'-0" PL HSS BEAM TYP. SEE PLAN SEE PLAN EXIST. BLDG. COL. COVERED W/ FIRE PROOFING SCRAPE & REPAIR AS NEEDED AT ANGLE ATTACHMENT 3/8"X6 /2"X0'-8" PL HSS BEAM SEE PLAN L4x4 No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT /2" TYP. C TYP. ANGLE TO HSS & PL TO HSS TYP. 3/6 L4X4X/4X0'-6" LG EA SIDE W/ (2) /4" STIFF. PL. TYP. ON BOTTOM OF HSS HSS COLUMN SEE PLAN B/STEEL EL. SEE PLAN B/STEEL EL. SEE PLAN L4X4X/4X0'-6" LG W/ (2) /4" STIFF. PL. EA. SIDE OF COLUMN TYP. B/STEEL EL. SEE PLAN L4X4X/4 W/ (2) /4" STIFF. PL. TYP. ON BOTTOM OF HSS HSS COLUMN SEE PLAN TYP. L4x4x/4 L4X4X/4 TYP. L4X4 TYP. EA. SIDE CUT TO LENGTH 0/4/207 2:59:42 PM C:\Users\rhart\Documents\ Cleveland Medical Mart_rhart.rvt D E F G 25' - 0" 25' - 0" 35' - 0" 35' - 0" (E) W24X55 (E) W8X40 (E) BRACED FRAME (E) BRACED FRAME L6x4x5/6 LLH L6x6x5/6 L4x4x/4 HANGER TYP. 8 PLACES L6x6x5/6 (E) W8X50 (E) W4X22 (E) W4X22 (E) W4X22 (E) W8X50 L6x4x5/6 LLH (E) W4X22 (E) W4X22 L6x4x5/6 LLH (E) W8X50 (E) W4X22 (E) W4X22 (E) BF L6x6x5/6 L3x3x/4 DIAGONAL 6 -S2 L6x6x5/6 L6x4x5/6 LLH NOTES:. T/EXIST. FLOOR STEEL EL. +29'-6 /2" 2. FPHT - FOLDING PARTITION HEAD TRACK - SEE DTL. THIS SHT. PARTIAL FRAMING PLAN -S2 SCALE: 3/6" = '-0" (E) W24X62 (E) W8X40 (E) W8X40 (E) W0X2 (E) W2X48 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W6X3 (E) W30X32 PLAN NORTH 5 -S2 (E) ELEVATOR SHAFT L6X6X5/6 HEADER L6X4X5/6 (LLV) KICKER 0' - 0" ' - /2" 3 -S2 (LSV) + FPHT (2) HSS4X6X3/8 (LSV) SIM. 2 -S2 3 -S2 L6X6X5/6 HEADER 4 -S2 L6X4X5/6 (LLV) KICKER 2 -S2 HSS4X6X3/8 (2) (LSV) + FPHT HSS4X6X3/8 (2) B/STL +7'- 0 5/8" AND +9'-4" B/STL +7'- 0 5/8" AND +9'- /2" SIM. 3 -S2 (E) W24X76 B/STL +7'- 0 5/8" AND +9'-4" (E) W24X76 (E) W24X76 (E) SAN L4x4x/4 HI AND (2) L4x4x/4 LO (E) SAN 22' - 9" L4x4x/4 HI AND (2) L4x4x/4 LO L4x4x/4 HI AND LO TYP. 3/6 L6X6 TYP. SPAN BETWEEN EXIST. FLOOR BEAMS 3/6 L6x6x5/6 CONT. EXIST. SLAB ON DECK EXIST. BEAM TYP. 2 SECTION -S2 SCALE: " = '-0" EXIST. FLOOR BEAM (BEYOND) L6X4 (LLV) KICKER 5 SECTION -S2 SCALE: " = '-0" HSS COLUMN + /4" CAP PL. SEE PLAN HSS BEAM SEE PLAN FOLDING PARTITION HEAD TRACK MAY OCCUR NOTE: ANY SPLICE IN L6x6 MUST BE AT CENTERLINE OF W6 BEAM 4'-0" o.c. MAX. 6" STUD KICKER 8 6" o.c. B/STEEL EL. SEE PLAN L6x4 (LLV) KICKER T/COLUMN EL. +9'-2" 3/6 L6x6x5/6 CONT. 6" STUD CONT. 8 KICKER MIDPOINT (4) #0 TEK SCREWS CEILING SEE ARCH. STUD SEE ARCH. TYP. (3) SIDES FIELD DRILL BOLT AND PIPE SLEEVE BY CURTAIN WALL SUPPLIER TYP. CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH. 3/6 FOLDING PARTITION HEAD TRACK MAY OCCUR HSS COLUMN SEE PLAN " CLR STUD TO ANGLE TYP. B/STEEL EL. SEE PLAN FIELD VERIFY TYP. 6" STUD 8 6" o.c. STUD WALL SUPPORT PARALLEL TO FLOOR STEEL DETAIL SCALE: /2" = '-0" CEILING SEE ARCH. 3 SECTION -S2 SCALE: " = '-0" EXIST. BEAM 6 SECTION -S2 SCALE: /2" = '-0" SEE ARCH. FIELD 8' - 9" FIELD VERIFY VERIFY EXIST. SLAB ON DECK L6x6 L6x6x5/6 CONT. TYP. L4x4 HANGER L5x5x5/6 KICKER L6x4 LLH EXIST. BEAM 3/6 6 STUD SEE ARCH. EXIST. SLAB ON DECK CURTAIN WALL SEE ARCH. EXIST. BEAM TYP. (BEYOND) 6" STUD KICKER 8 6" o.c. NOTE: FOR TYP. WELDING, SEE SECTION 2 THIS SHT. 4 SECTION -S2 SCALE: " = '-0" HSS SHIM HEAD TRACK SEE ARCH. FOR LOCATION NOTE: ANY SPLICE IN L6x6 OR W6 MUST BE AT CENTERLINE OF EXIST BEAM W6x5 CONT. 6" STUD CONT. 8 KICKER MIDPOINT (4) #0 TEK SCREWS CEILING SEE ARCH. 3/6 6" STUD 8 6" o.c. CEILING SEE ARCH. DRILL AND TAP FOR /4"Ø BOLT GRADE 5 AT ± 9 3/4" o.c. TYP. (TRACK PREDRILLED TO 250 mm). PARKED END REQUIRES (6) BOLTS AT 3 /4" o.c. - SEE ARCH. FOR PARKED END LOCATION. FOLDING PARTITION HEAD TRACK ATTACHMENT DETAIL SCALE: 3" = '-0" STUD WALL SUPPORT PERPENDICULAR TO FLOOR STEEL DETAIL SCALE: /2" = '-0" TYP. ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC. MANAGERS NOTICE DRAWING NO. -S2 C I ON ONS T RUC T 3000 Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: FIRST FLOOR RETAIL TENANTS FIT OUT FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN BWE DET 8832

335 I 2.5 DATES AND REVISIONS No. Date / Description BID/PERMIT 7 CAP DUCT /4" HWR /4" HWS REMOVE BACK TO MAIN AND CAP 8" SA (ETR) 5 6/4 SA (ETR) SMOKE EXHAUST MAKE-UP DUCT 20/6 SA W/ "AL FPVAV-05X /4" HWR 3/4" HWS VAV-05X-07 0 VAV-05X /20 SA (ETR) C T 56/20 (ETR) 56/20 (ETR) 36/24 RA (ETR) CAP PIPING 5 42/20 SA (ETR) 24/4 RA (ETR) FPVAV-05X-03 VAV-05X VAV-05X-08 FPVAV-05X-03 2" SA (ETR) C T C T 6/4 SA (REX) 6/4 SA VAV-05X-08,09 3 6" SA (REX) 32/20 SA (ETR) 2" SA (ETR) " HWS " HWR 2" HWR 2" HWS 24/4 RA (ETR) 28/20 RA (ETR) ENGINEERS ARCHI TECTS M AN AGE R S C I ON ON S TRU C T C T 2/2 SA 2/2 SA (REX) 3 FPVAV-05X-02 4 VAV-05X- T 0 VAV-05X- 2/8 SA (REX) 0/2 SA (REX) 6" SA (REX) VAV-05X " SA (REX) T C VAV-05X-05, /6 SA (ETR) 2 VAV-05X-05 8" SA (REX) 0" SA (ETR) 3/4" HWS 3/4" HWR CAP CAP PIPING 2" SA (ETR) " HWS " HWR 4/2 SA (REX) 24/4 RA (ETR) 24/4 RA (ETR) 20/6 SA 24/4 RA (ETR) RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES INC Shaker Boulevard / Cleveland, Ohio 4420 Phone: (26) Fax: (26) @rlba.com NOTICE THIS ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWING IS GIVEN IN CONFIDENCE. NO USE OR DISSEMINATION MAY BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ALL RIGHTS ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY RESERVED. 207 RICHARD L. BOWEN + ASSOCIATES, INC. 2/0 SA (ETR) VAV-05X-0 3/4" HWS 5 3/4" HWR 3" HWS 3" HWR SHEET SIZE 30x42 J:\207\7024\DELIVERABLES\DRAWINGS\ACAD\GCHI AU BON PAIN RELOCATION\Sheets\Mechanical\-HD HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN.dwg SAVED: KJOHNSON :38 PLOT: :4 GENERAL NOTES. ALL HWS/R PIPING IS ETR, EXCEPT WHERE NOTED. X 6 0" SA (ETR) PLAN NOTES 20/6 SA W/ "AL. ETR VAV. 2. ETR VAV, REX SA DIFFUSERS AND DUCTWORK BACK TO POINT INDICATED & PREPARE FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. 3. REX SA DIFFUSERS AND DUCTWORK BACK TO POINT INDICATED AND CAP. 4. REMOVE SENSORS, PROTECT IN STORAGE FOR REINSTALLATION. 5. REX RETURN AIR GRILLE AND DUCTWORK. 6. DUCT SERVING COAT CHECK AND CUSTOMER SERVICE. 7. ETR SA UP. 8. ETR FPVAV. FPVAV TO BE IN OPERATION DURING CONSTRUCTION EXCEPT FOR WHEN WORK ON FPVAV IS REQUIRED. 9. RR FPVAV & VAV. REX DUCTWORK & PIPING TO POINT INDICATED AND CAP. 0. REX VAV, REX SA DIFFUSERS, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING BACK TO POINT INDICATED & CAP. FPVAV-05X " SA (ETR) /4" HWS /4" HWR 0" SA (ETR) HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: /4" = '-0" 0 2' 4' 6' 8' 0" SA (ETR) 3" HWR 3" HWS 6 0" SA (ETR) " HWR " HWS GLOBAL CENTER FOR HEALTH INNOVATION ST CLAIR AVENUE NE, CLEVELAND, OH 444 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: RLB NO.: DRAWING NO. HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN KAJ MGS HD